JP2007082726A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To optimize the operation of initializing the data stored backup in a game machine which makes the shift to the specified game status advantageous for players and gets the game status data and the game history data respectively stored backup when the result of the variable display of identifying information is as specified. <P>SOLUTION: The initialization of the game history data is carried out with the conditions that the initialization operation with an operation key 190 is judged to be done. So, when the game state data and the game history data are initialized together, the operations of the operation means complicated to handle are confined to the operation of one operation means a clear switch and other necessary operations are all allotted to the operation key 190 provided on the front side of the game machine, namely, an operation means simpler to handle. This enables the optimization of the operation of initializing the data stored backup in the backup memory structure of storing the game status data and the game history data respectively. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention includes a display device that performs a predetermined display, and performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified by the display device based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, variable display is performed by updating or scrolling predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as LCD: Liquid Crystal Display). There are a number of games that are enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result.

  A special figure game that is played as one of the variable display games is a variable display of the display symbol based on the detection of the game ball passing through the start winning opening (that the variable display start condition is satisfied). In this game, the case where the stop symbol form when the display is completely stopped is a predetermined specific display form is determined as “big hit”. In this special figure game, when a “hit” is made, a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state that makes it easy for a player to win a game ball is continuously provided for a certain period of time. . Such a state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”.

  The progress of the game in such a gaming machine is controlled by game control means such as a microcomputer. The game control means includes means for generating a pseudo-random number, and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied based on the value of the random number (for example, whether or not the display result of variable display is a combination of specific display modes) Or). For example, the game control means determines whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied by determining whether or not a random number value matches a predetermined determination value. When it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game control means shifts the gaming state to the specific gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, one that reduces the mounting area for mounting the random number generating means and the game control means on the substrate by using a microcomputer equipped with a random number circuit as the game control means is known (for example, a patent Reference 1). Further, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the microcomputer by using a random number generated by a random number circuit mounted on the microcomputer.

  Some of such gaming machines generally have a function of backing up the gaming state. For example, when power supply as a power source supplied to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure or the like, backup data indicating a gaming state when the power supply is stopped is stored, and power supply is started later. In addition, control for restoring the gaming state is performed based on the stored data. In such a gaming machine, when the backup data is initialized when power supply is started, the game store clerk operates the clear switch to initialize the backup data.

For this type of gaming machine, game history data such as the number of out balls and the number of safe balls is accumulated and stored in the gaming machine, and the game history information is displayed on the display device based on the game history data according to the operation of the gaming machine. Some display (for example, refer to Patent Document 2). Further, for this type of gaming machine, the gaming history data stored and stored as described above is backed up and stored so that gaming history information can be accumulated across days, weeks, months, etc. (For example, refer to Patent Document 3). As described above, in the gaming machine that stores the game history data in a backup manner, the game store information is initialized by the game store clerk operating the accumulated data clear switch.
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-103166 (paragraphs 0039, 0041, 0095, 0100, FIGS. 3, 4, 20, 21) JP-A-7-51460 (paragraph 0034-paragraph 0037) JP 2002-35359 A (paragraph 0027, paragraph 0040, paragraph 0055, FIG. 9)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt setting is performed, the initial value of the random number circuit is set as a random number maximum value, a random number updating method, and Set the synchronization to update the random number. However, since the initial values of the random numbers to be generated are all set to the same value, when using a plurality of gaming machines, each gaming machine starts generating random numbers from a common initial value. Then, when using a plurality of gaming machines described in Patent Document 1, when the power of each gaming machine is turned on at the same time, each gaming machine starts generating random numbers from the same initial position at the same timing. There is a possibility that the timing may be recognized by the player or the game store. Therefore, there is a possibility that a condition for shifting to a specific gaming state such as a big hit may be illegally established by generating a capture signal using a wireless signal or the like at a predetermined cycle.

  In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the game history data as described above is backed up and stored in a gaming machine that stores game state data as shown in Patent Document 2 and Patent Document 3 in the conventional manner, the game state data and the game history When it was desired to initialize the data, it was necessary to individually operate the clear switch for each data, which was troublesome.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information becomes the specific display result, the game state data and the game history are transferred to a specific game state advantageous to the player. An object of the present invention is to properly perform an initialization operation of data stored in a backup in a gaming machine that stores data in a backup manner.

  In order to achieve the above object, the invention according to claim 1 includes a display device (for example, first to fourth variable display devices 8A to 8D) that performs a predetermined display, and a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) that can be identified by the display device on the basis that a game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A or a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 12B. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific game state (for example, advantageous for the player) (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to a jackpot game state, and has a built-in random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 503) for generating random numbers, and controls the progress of the game Display control signal (for example, production control command) for executing the control process (for example, step S22 to step S34a (excluding steps S30 and S31a) of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 40) and controlling the display device ) And a game control board (eg, main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer (eg, game control microcomputer 560) is mounted, and a display control for controlling the display device based on the display control signal. A display control board (eg, an effect control board 80) on which a microcomputer (eg, an effect control microcomputer 118) is mounted, and a rear side of the gaming machine (eg, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2). Provided on the power supply board 910), and outputs an initialization signal (for example, a clear signal) according to the operation. Initialization operation means (for example, clear switch 921) to be performed, and the front side of the gaming machine (for example, the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3 provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1), the display When a predetermined operation screen (game shop menu screen shown in FIG. 60, etc.) is displayed on the device, an operation (history) for displaying a history of games (game history information) performed on the gaming machine on the display device. Display operation means (operation key 190 in FIG. 3) for performing a data clear operation and a game history information display operation, and the random number circuit is based on an input of a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal). Numerical value updating means for updating numerical data according to a predetermined order from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value in a predetermined range in which numerical data (for example, count value) can be updated (example) For example, the counter 521) and random number storage means (for example, a random value storage circuit 531) for storing numerical data updated by the numerical value update means as random number values, the gaming control microcomputer includes a gaming machine Random number circuit initial setting means (for example, a part for executing step S14 in the game control microcomputer 560) for initial setting of the random number circuit when power supply to the power supply is started, and the random number circuit initial setting means Interrupt setting means (for example, a part for executing step S15 in the game control microcomputer 560) for setting to generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time after the initial setting of the random number circuit; Interrupt processing execution means for executing a timer interrupt process including the game control process when the timer interrupt occurs ( For example, when the variable display execution condition is satisfied in the timer interrupt process by the interrupt process executing means in the part for executing steps S21 to S35 in the game control microcomputer 560 (for example, in step S231). NO), a random number reading means for reading the random number value stored in the random number storage means (for example, a part for executing steps S204b and S209b in the game control microcomputer 560), and the random number value read by the random number reading means By determining whether or not a predetermined determination value is met, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is set as the specific display result, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed. Pre-determining means for determining before playing (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) A portion for executing step S238), and game state data indicating the progress of the game, and storing the game state data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (For example, the RAM 55 backed up by a backup power source) and initialization signal confirmation means for confirming whether or not the initialization signal is output from the initialization operation means (Step S7 in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed). And the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and it is confirmed by the initialization confirmation means that the initialization signal is not output (NO in the process of step S7). On the basis of the game state data stored in the game control storage means. Game control recovery means for executing the old game control recovery process (for example, the part for executing steps S91 to S94 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the power supply to the gaming machine are started, and the initialization signal When it is confirmed by the confirmation means that the initialization signal has been output (YES in the process of step S7), the game state data stored in the game control storage means is initialized. Game control initialization means for executing a game control initialization process (for example, a part for executing steps S10 to S12 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display control microcomputer includes the game control Based on the display control signal from the microcomputer, the display device recognizes it. Display control means for performing variable display of information and deriving and displaying a display result according to the determination result by the prior determination means (for example, a portion for executing step S611 and step S612 in the production control microcomputer 118); Based on the display control signal from the game control microcomputer, game history data creation means for creating game history data indicating the history of games played in the gaming machine (for example, step S614 in the effect control microcomputer 118). And the game history data created by the game history data creation means, and stores the game history data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Storage means (for example, power supply backup mounted on the production control board 80) And a game history display process for displaying the game history on the display device based on the game history data stored in the display control storage means in response to an operation of the display operation means. Game history display processing means to be executed (for example, a part for executing step S733 in the effect control microcomputer 118) and game state data for confirming whether or not the game state data has been initialized in the game control microcomputer Initialization confirmation means (for example, the processing of step S602 to step S604 in the production control microcomputer 118 is executed, and for example, it is confirmed that the game state data has been initialized when it is determined that the predetermined time recovery command has not been received. And the power supply to the gaming machine is started, The game state data initialization confirmation means confirms that the game state data has not been initialized (for example, it is determined YES in the process of step S602) before the power supply is stopped. A game history recovery means (for example, the step of executing step S606 in the production control microcomputer 118) that makes it possible to recover the display of the game history based on the game history data stored in the display control storage means; For initialization operation for initializing the game history data when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the gaming state data initialization confirmation means confirms that the gaming state data has been initialized. Operation screen display processing means for displaying a screen (game shop menu screen in FIG. 60) (for example, a microcomputer for effect control). And the initialization operation for initializing the game history by the display operation means only when the initialization operation screen is displayed by the operation screen display means. Enabling means (for example, the part of step S621a in the production control microcomputer 118 to execute), and when the initialization operation is enabled by the enabling means, the display operating means performs the Initialization operation determination means for determining whether or not the initialization operation has been performed (for example, the part of step S622 in the production control microcomputer 118) and the initialization operation determination means have performed the initialization operation. On the condition that it is determined, the game history data stored in the display control storage means is initialized. Game history initialization means for executing the game history initialization process (for example, the process of clearing the history data in response to the clear operation of the history data in the portion executing step S623 in the effect control microcomputer 118) The random number circuit initial setting means includes the predetermined initial value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value update means for each of the game control microcomputers in the initial setting. Setting based on microcomputer identification information for identifying the game control microcomputer (for example, an ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560) (for example, the step of executing step S154b in the game control microcomputer 560) It is characterized by.

  In the invention according to claim 2, the display control microcomputer is in a normal state in which identification information can be variably displayed on the display device after power supply to the gaming machine is started. For example, variable display determination means (for example, effect control) that determines whether or not the identification information is variably displayed on the display device over a predetermined period in a normal state; Portion of the microcomputer 118 for executing step S746), and when the variable display determination means determines that the variable display of the identification information is not performed on the display device (for example, YES in step S746), A normal operation screen that allows a game history based on the game history data to be displayed in response to an operation by the display operation means ( For example, it further includes normal operation screen display means for displaying the player menu screen in FIG. 62 (b) (for example, a part for executing step S764 in the production control microcomputer 118). .

  In the invention according to claim 3, the microcomputer for display control is displaying the game history on the display device (for example, when the game information display process (step S733) is executed). Game history stop means for stopping display of the game history on the display device when a signal indicating the start of variable display (for example, first variable display pattern command) is input (for example, YES in step S761). When the display of the game history is stopped by the game history stop means (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 118 that executes Step S771 and Step S772), the display on the display device is the identification information. Variable display switching means (for example, in the production control microcomputer 118). A portion) for performing the steps S772 that, and further comprising a.

  Further, in the invention according to claim 4, the game control microcomputer is one of the game control recovery process and the game control initialization process after the power supply to the game machine is started. A power supply start process specific signal output means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S94) that outputs a power supply start process specific signal (for example, a recovery command) that can specify that one has been executed. The display control microcomputer determines whether or not the power supply start process specific signal is input in a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Start processing specific signal input determining means (for example, step S602 to step S602 in the production control microcomputer 118) The game state data initialization confirmation unit confirms whether or not the game state data has been initialized based on the determination by the start time processing specific signal input determination unit. It is characterized by that.

  In the invention according to claim 5, the game control microcomputer displays a demonstration image (for example, a demonstration display) displayed when the identification information is not variably displayed for a predetermined period on the display device. Demo display signal output means (for example, a part for executing step S28 in the game control microcomputer 560) for outputting a demo display control signal (for example, a first demo display command, a second demo display command) to be instructed to the display control board. And the display control microcomputer has finished displaying the game history in response to an operation by the display operation means on the display device based on the input of the demonstration display control signal. Later, the demonstration image corresponding to the demonstration display control signal is displayed. Display switching means (for example, portions for performing the steps S767, S769 in effect control microcomputer 118), further comprising a.

  In the invention according to claim 6, the display operation means inputs an operation signal output in response to an operation to the display control microcomputer (for example, the operation signal of the operation key 190 in FIG. 7). Is input from the input port 669 of the effect control board 80), and the history display processing means executes the game history display processing based on the operation signal.

  In the invention according to claim 7, a game ball number counting means for playing a game by launching a game ball into a game area (for example, the game area 7) and counting the number of game balls to be thrown into the game area. (For example, a fire ball sensor 194), and the display control storage means stores the number of game balls counted by the game ball number counting means as the game history data (for example, as shown in FIG. 4). The detection signal of the ball sensor 194 is input to the effect control board 80, and is totaled as history data in steps S782 and S783 of the game data collection process (step S614).

  In the invention according to claim 8, the game control microcomputer uses a random number circuit (for example, a 12-bit random number circuit 503a and a 16-bit random number circuit) having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means. 503b) The plurality of built-in random number circuit initial setting means sets a usable random number circuit from the plurality of random number circuits built in the game control microcomputer in the initial setting (for example, a game control micro The computer 560 executes step S151), and random number stopping means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) stops the function of the random number circuit other than the random number circuit set to be usable by the random number circuit initial setting means. When the random number circuit 503 used in is set, it is set not to use Wherein the counter 521 of the random number circuit is provided with a portion) to control not to update the count value C.

  In the invention according to claim 9, the random number circuit initial setting means is a numerical maximum value register (for example, a value as a maximum value of the predetermined range in which numerical data is updated in the initial setting) In the random number maximum value setting register 535), a predetermined maximum value (for example, a random number maximum value) within a range of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means is set, and the numerical value updating means sets the random number circuit initial setting. Setting value determining means (for example, game) for determining whether the predetermined maximum value set by the means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (for example, “256” when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set) The step of executing step S153b in the control microcomputer 560), and the set value determination means sets the value in the maximum value register. When it is determined that the predetermined maximum value is less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value, a predetermined value (for example, 12 bits) within a range of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means is stored in the numerical maximum value register. And a maximum value resetting means (for example, a part for executing step S153c in the game control microcomputer 560) for resetting “4095” when the random number circuit 503a is set.

  Further, in the invention according to claim 10, the random number circuit initial setting means includes the random number circuit initial setting means when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value update means in the initial setting. It is set whether or not to change the predetermined initial value that has been set (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S157), and the random number circuit uses the numerical value updating means to obtain numerical data up to the predetermined final value. Is updated, the notification signal output means (for example, the output terminal of the counter 521) for outputting a notification signal indicating that the numerical data has been updated to the predetermined final value, and the notification signal is output When the initial value is changed by the random number circuit initial setting means, the initial value for changing the predetermined initial value is set. Value change means (e.g., portions for performing the steps S220~226 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) and, characterized in that it comprises a.

  In the invention according to claim 1, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming state data is initialized on the gaming control microcomputer side according to the operation of the initialization operating means provided on the rear surface of the gaming machine. When it is confirmed that the game history data has been stored on the display control microcomputer before the power supply is stopped, an initialization operation screen for initializing the game history data is displayed on the display device. Then, the stored game history data is initialized on the condition that it is determined that the initialization operation by the display operation means that is effective only when the initialization operation screen is displayed. . For this reason, when the game state data and the game history data are initialized together, the operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine, that is, the operation means that is complicated to operate, is referred to as initialization operation means. The game state data is limited to the operation of one operation means, and other necessary operations are assigned to the display operation means provided on the front side of the gaming machine, that is, the operation means easy to operate. In the configuration in which the game history data and the game history data are backed up respectively, the initialization operation of the data stored in the backup can be simplified.

  The display operation means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine and can be operated by the player. However, the initialization operation by the display operation means is for initialization operation provided on the rear side of the gaming machine. Since it is effective only when the screen is displayed, the initialization of the game history data is based on the precondition that the initialization operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine is operated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from initializing the game history data without permission.

  In addition, the gaming control microcomputer performs initial setting of the random number circuit from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt setting is performed, and the initial value of the random number is set based on the microcomputer identification information in the initial setting. Since it is configured to set as a value, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be improved. In addition, since the randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and by generating a capture signal using a radio signal for a gaming machine It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state from being illegally established.

  Further, in the invention according to claim 2, in the normal state, when the variable display of the identification information is not performed on the display device for a predetermined period, the game history based on the game history data can be displayed. Therefore, if there is no variable display for a predetermined period, the player can freely see the game history.

  In the invention according to claim 3, when a game history is being displayed on the display device and a signal indicating the start of variable display is input to the display control microcomputer, The display of the history is stopped and the display is switched to the variable display of the identification information. For this reason, in the display device, the identification information used for the game is preferentially executed rather than the display of the game history, so that the player can be prevented from erroneously recognizing the variable display of the identification information. Further, when the variable display is executed, it is not necessary to bother to end the display of the displayed game history, so that it is possible to save the trouble of operation when the display is switched.

  In the invention according to claim 4, after power supply to the gaming machine is started, one of game control recovery processing and game control initialization processing is executed from the game control microcomputer. The power supply start process specific signal is output in a predetermined period after the power supply start process specific signal is output and the display control microcomputer starts the power supply to the gaming machine. Based on the determination as to whether or not the game state data has been input, it is confirmed whether or not the game state data has been initialized. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the types of display control signals used for confirming whether or not the game state data has been initialized.

  Further, in the invention according to claim 5, when the demonstration display control signal is input to the display control microcomputer, in the display device, after the display of the game history in accordance with the operation by the display operation means, A demonstration image corresponding to the display control signal is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display of the game history that has been displayed according to the operation by the display operation means from being switched to the demonstration image unnecessarily. Thereby, waste of operation can be eliminated.

  In the invention according to claim 6, since the display control microcomputer executes the game history display process based on the operation signal from the display operation means, the game control microcomputer related to displaying the game history is displayed. The processing burden on the computer can be reduced.

  Further, in the invention according to claim 7, since the number of game balls to be thrown into the game area is stored as game history data, the game area is transferred to the game area until a predetermined game value is given based on the game history data. It is possible to grasp the number of game balls required for driving. For this reason, it is a gaming machine having a track record in which a predetermined game value is likely to be given based on displaying the number of game balls required for driving into the game area as a game history until the predetermined game value is given. The player can easily determine whether the gaming machine is superior or inferior.

  In the invention according to claim 8, since it is configured to set whether or not each of a plurality of random number circuits having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated is usable, the random number to be used By setting only the circuit, the range of the random number value to be generated can be set appropriately. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer can be reduced.

  In the invention according to claim 9, since the value as the maximum value of the predetermined range in which the numerical data is updated is set in advance, the range of random numbers used during the execution of the timer interrupt process Generation of a random number having a larger value can be prevented, and the processing load on the random number circuit and the game control microcomputer can be reduced. In addition, when the predetermined maximum value that is set is equal to or less than the predetermined lower limit value, the predetermined maximum value is reset. It is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number by an action such as generating a captured signal to the gaming machine.

  In the invention according to claim 10, since the predetermined initial value is updated when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. Can be improved.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, a card reader (CR: Card Reader) that performs a special game with a display device such as a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) as a gaming machine and lends a ball with a prepaid card. A pachinko gaming machine of the type will be described as an example, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the player side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is represented by the front, front, front, front, and the opposite side of the player across the pachinko gaming machine 1 is back, back, rear, rear, back, Shown on the back. First, an overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate 140 (see FIG. 2) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (to be described later) attached to them. And the game board 6).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and an operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls to the game area 7. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the front frame located on the back side of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body.

  In addition, two speakers 30 for generating sound effects and sounds are provided on the left and right upper parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a top frame lamp 40 as a game effect lamp is provided on the upper and left and right parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A frame lamp 41 and a right frame lamp 42 are provided. In this embodiment, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls below the left speaker 30 is provided, and a ball that is turned on when the supply ball is cut below the right speaker 30. A cut lamp 52 is provided. Further, a decoration lamp 17 as a light emitting member is provided on the left side and the right side of the game area 7, and a status indicator lamp 25 is provided below the decoration lamp 17 provided on the right side of the game area 7. Yes. The decoration lamp 17 is lit or blinked according to the gaming state, and notifies the player when the big hit gaming state, which will be described later, occurs or continues, and raises the gaming atmosphere.

  Although not shown in the drawings, a side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 accepts a prepaid card (game card) as a recording medium owned by the player and lends a game ball as a game medium to the player (lending or ball lending) A card unit device 50 is also provided as a recording medium processing device. Further, a hitting ball launching device 93 that rotates the launch motor 94 by operating the operation handle 5 and launches a game ball using the rotational force of the launch motor 94 is also provided.

  On the surface of the game board 6, a guide rail 14 for guiding the launched game ball is planted in a substantially circular shape, and a game area 7 is formed by an area partitioned by the guide rail 14. In the vicinity of the entrance of the hit ball in the game area 7, a launch ball sensor 194 is provided which is a magnetic sensor for detecting the game ball to be shot into the game area 7. In addition, as a sensor for detecting a game ball to be thrown into the game area 7, it may be provided in a supply path of game balls to the hit ball launching device 93 to detect the supplied game balls. Such a sensor for detecting a game ball may be a sensor for optically detecting the game ball, and any detection method may be adopted.

  In addition, a first variable display device 8A and a second variable display device 8B that variably display special symbols as identification information that can be distinguished from each other are provided at a substantially central position of the game area 7. The first variable display device Below the 8A, there is provided a third variable display device 8C capable of performing variable display or the like of decorative symbols different from the special symbols variably displayed on the first variable display device 8A, and the second variable display device 8B. Is provided with a fourth variable display device 8D capable of performing variable display of a decorative symbol different from the special symbol variably displayed on the second variable display device 8B. Note that the first and second variable display devices 8A and 8B in the present embodiment are configured by 7-segment LEDs, and the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D have three variable display units of left, middle, and right. The liquid crystal display device (LCD) having

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D are special symbols for enhancing the decorative effect of variable display of special symbols in the first variable display device and the second variable display devices 8A and 8B. This symbol has a decorative meaning that is variably displayed with a predetermined relationship with the variable display. The predetermined relationship includes, for example, a relationship in which the variable symbol display is started when the variable symbol variable display is started, or when the special symbol variable display is ended and the display result is displayed. This includes a relationship in which variable display ends and display results are displayed. When the display result of the first variable display device 8A is a jackpot symbol, the display result of the third variable display device 8C is also a combination of predetermined jackpot symbols that generate a jackpot (for example, the same symbol is one of the hit lines) When the display result of the second variable display device 8B is a big hit symbol, the display result of the fourth variable display device 8D is also a combination of predetermined big hit symbols that generates a big hit. (For example, when the same symbol is aligned with any one of the winning lines), the display results are controlled so as to maintain consistency.

  Further, an ordinary winning ball device (first start winning port) 12A is arranged below the third variable display device 8C, and an ordinary symbol display 10 and an ordinary variable winning ball are arranged below the fourth variable display device 8D. A device (second start winning opening) 12B and the like are arranged. A first special variable winning ball device (first big winning port) 13A is provided below the normal winning ball device 12A. On the other hand, a second special variable winning ball apparatus (second large winning opening) 13B is provided below the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 12B. A start memory LED 9 is provided below the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B, and a normal symbol start memory LED 11 is provided on the right side of the normal symbol display 10.

  The first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B are composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs. The first variable display device 8A is a variable display game (a special figure) that is played based on the start condition (first start condition) established by winning a game ball to the normal winning ball apparatus 12A, and the start condition is satisfied. In the (game), for example, special symbols which are composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9” and function as plural types of identification information each identifiable are variably displayed. In the second variable display device 8B, a start condition (second start condition) is established by winning a game ball to the normal variable pay ball apparatus 12B, and a variable display game (special feature) is played based on the establishment of the start condition. In the figure game), for example, special symbols which are composed of numbers such as “0” to “9” and function as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed.

  When a game ball flowing down the game area 7 wins the normal winning ball device 12A, the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 20a (see FIG. 4), whereby the first start condition is satisfied. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B is a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary normal) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are controlled to move between a vertical (normally open) position and a tilt (enlarged open) position by a solenoid 23 for a normal electric accessory. (Electric accessory). The normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B sets the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B to a predetermined value when the display result of the normal symbol variable display (normal game) by the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined hit symbol. By controlling the tilting until the time elapses, it becomes easier to win the game ball than when the movable wing piece is set to the vertical position. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 12B is detected by the second start port switch 20b (see FIG. 4), and the second start condition is established by the detection. In this embodiment, the ordinary winning ball device 12A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 12B are used and only one of them is provided with a tulip-shaped accessory. However, the ordinary winning ball device 12A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 12B are provided. It is good also as a structure which equips both with a tulip type accessory, and it is good also as a structure which does not equip both with a tulip type accessory. The ordinary winning ball apparatus 12A may be provided with a tulip-shaped accessory, and the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 12B may be configured without a tulip-shaped accessory.

  The first special variable winning ball device 13A includes an opening / closing plate that opens and closes a winning area by a first big winning port solenoid 24a, and the second special variable winning ball device 13B includes a second big winning port solenoid. 24b is provided with an opening / closing plate that controls opening / closing of the winning area. The opening / closing plate is in a closed state at a normal time, for example, before the big hit gaming state is generated after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is achieved based on the result of the special game by the first variable display device 8A, the first big winning opening solenoid 24a is used for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number of winning balls are generated in the winning area. After opening in this period, it closes. Further, when a big hit gaming state is reached based on the result of the special game by the second variable display device 8B, the second big prize opening solenoid 24b is used for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number of winning balls are generated in the winning area. After opening in this period, it closes. When a game ball is won in the winning area when the opening / closing plate is opened by the first special variable winning ball device 13A, a predetermined number is determined based on the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 22a. When a number of prize balls are paid out and a game ball is won in the prize area when the opening / closing plate is opened in the second special variable prize ball device 13B, the game ball is played by the second count switch 22b. A predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection of.

  The start memory LED 9 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like. Based on the stored contents of the special figure holding memory 570 (FIG. 29), the game ball enters the normal winning ball device 12A or the normal variable winning ball device 12B and is displayed in the first variable display. In order to start variable display due to a reason that the previous special figure game is being executed although the start condition for starting the special figure game by either the device 8A or the second variable display device 8B is established. The number of stored storages for which the start condition is not satisfied is displayed. For example, in the start memory LED 9, the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is turned on.

  In addition to the above configuration, a windmill (not shown) with a built-in lamp, an out port 15 and the like are provided on the surface of the game board 6. The game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device 93 enters the game area 7 through the guide rail 14 and then descends the game area 7. Then, the game balls that have not won any prize opening provided in the game area 7 are taken into the out port 15 provided in the lower part of the game area 7 and guided to the back of the game board 6.

  Next, the configuration of the hitting ball supply tray 3 will be described. The hitting ball supply tray 3 is configured by fixing a tray member in which a plurality of synthetic resin members are combined. A ball removal operation lever 16 is provided above the open side of the hitting ball supply tray 3. This ball removal operation lever 16 is provided so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and is moved in one direction against the biasing force of the spring, whereby the ball stored in the hitting ball supply tray 3 is formed on the back side. A ball removal path and a ball removal hole (not shown) are caused to flow down and guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4.

  In addition, the hitting ball supply tray 3 has an operation unit that is operated when borrowing a ball through a card unit device 50 provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a third variable display device 8C or a fourth variable display. When a predetermined operation screen for displaying game history information and the like as will be described later is displayed on the device 8D, operation keys 190 as display operation means that enable operation of various buttons on the display screen and the like ( As will be described later with reference to FIG. 3, a plurality of keys are provided.

  The operation unit includes a ball lending switch 98 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 6), a return switch 99 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 6), and a balance display board 102 (see FIG. 4) on which each display LED is mounted. The display substrate 102 is provided so as to face the upper surface of the hit ball supply tray 3. The balance display board 102 is connected to a payout control board 100 (to be described later) via an interface board 101 (to be described later).

  The operation key 190 is a generic name for a plurality of operation key switches as will be described later with reference to FIG. The operation key 190 becomes effective when a predetermined operation screen is displayed on the third variable display device 8C or the fourth variable display device 8D.

  The card unit device 50 installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the above-described ball lending switch 98 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 6) and the return switch 99 (reference numeral in FIG. 6) provided on the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3. It is actuated by operating an operation unit such as (only described). Thus, on the front side of the card unit device 50, an available indicator (not shown) for displaying whether or not the card unit device 50 is usable, and the card unit device 50 corresponds to the pachinko gaming machine 1 on either side. A connection direction indicator (not shown) for displaying whether or not the card is inserted, a card insertion slot (not shown) for inserting a prepaid card made of a magnetic card, and the like are provided.

  The card unit device 50 accepts the above-mentioned prepaid card and lends a ball to the player based on the use (withdrawal) of the remaining card amount owned by the player specified by the record information of the accepted prepaid card (hereinafter referred to as lending) Or card lending device). By renting the balls thus rented, a game using the game balls in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes possible. The card unit device 50 is equipped with a card unit control microcomputer for performing various controls such as control relating to processing of prepaid cards and control relating to lending of rented balls.

  The card unit device 50 configured as described above is controlled by a unique control circuit, and is connected to an interface board 101 to be described later via a card unit wiring, and the interface board 101 is connected from the card unit wiring. Is connected to the payout control board 100 via the. The function of the card unit device 50 may be built in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a pachinko gaming machine that does not have the card unit device 50 and has no card lending function. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the card unit apparatus was illustrated as a unit apparatus for lending a ball | bowl to a player (lending a ball | bowl), the unit apparatus which can insert a banknote etc. may be sufficient, for example.

  On the other hand, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 2, a mechanism plate 140 equipped with various mechanisms for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the occurrence of winning balls is provided. A ball hitting device 93 is fixed to the back surface corresponding to the operation handle 5.

  The hitting board launcher 93 is provided with a launch board 107. The hitting board launcher 93 is driven and controlled by the launch board 107. The launch board 107 is accommodated in the board box 107a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a back pack 81 a is attached to the back surface of the game board 6 at the center of the back side of the game board 6. The back pack 81a is formed with an opening (not shown) that faces the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D. A display device 8D and a liquid crystal box 81b for housing the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D are attached.

  The effect control board box 125 is directly attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal box 81b. In this effect control board box 125, a lamp driver board 35, an audio frame lamp board 70, and an effect control board 80 are accommodated and attached.

  The audio frame lamp board 70 drives the decoration lamp 17 provided on the game board 6, the game effect lamps 40 to 42 provided on the glass door frame 2, the speaker 30, etc. in accordance with information signals from the main board 31. It is something to control. The audio frame lamp board 70 causes the lamp driver board 35 to control the lighting state of the decoration lamp 17 by outputting a control signal to the lamp driver board 35 that drives the decoration lamp 17 provided on the game board 6.

  The effect control board 80 drives and controls the variable display operations of the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D in accordance with the type of information signal from the main board 31. Further, the effect control board 80 exchanges information signals with the voice frame lamp board 70.

  On the rear surface of the effect control board box 125, a main board mounting base 135 is provided so as to be hinged on the left side and freely openable and closable. A main board box 136 is attached to the main board mounting base 135. The main board 31 is accommodated and attached in the main board box 136. In the present embodiment, since the main board 31 is attached to the game board 6, when the game board is replaced with a new game board, the main board 31 can be replaced together.

  The main board box 136 covers the main board box base, covers the main board box cover, inserts and screws the caulking screws into the caulking parts provided on the left and right sides, and seals them with caulking caps from above. Unless it is cut, it cannot be opened. Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the main board box 136 is opened based on whether or not the crimped portion is cut.

  A board external terminal board 104 is attached to the upper right of the back pack 81a. This board external terminal board 104 is in a jackpot gaming state with game information necessary for business management of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, one jackpot information notifying that the jackpot gaming state is in effect, a probability variation pattern described later, Big hit 2 information (output during the big hit and during the probability change) that reports that the big hit gaming state and the probability fluctuation due to the big hit (the state where the probability of winning a big hit is improved compared to the normal gaming state and the time shortening state) Signal that continues to be played), probability variation information to notify that the probability variation after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the probability variation symbol, time shortened state after the jackpot gaming state end (the variation time of the special symbol compared to the normal gaming state) Time shortening information for notifying that the state is being shortened), first starting port information for notifying the number of hit balls in which the first starting port switch 20a is turned on, and the second starting port Second starting port information for informing the number of hit balls with the switch 20b turned on, first symbol determination number 1 information for informing the number of fluctuation operations of the first variable display device 8A, and the number of fluctuation operations of the second variable display device 8B The second symbol determination number 1 information for informing the player, the symbol determination number 2 information for notifying the number of times the normal symbol display unit fluctuates, and the accessory number of times 2 information for notifying the number of times the normal variable winning ball apparatus is opened and closed) An external connection terminal (not shown) for outputting to a management computer installed in the main board 31 is provided. Further, information such as which one of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B has displayed the big hit symbol, which symbol has won the big hit, and which symbol has been stopped may be output.

  Next, the configuration of the mechanism plate 140 provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 2, a mechanism plate 140 mainly includes a prize ball tank 147 that stores a large amount of prize balls, and a plurality of rows of prize balls stored in the prize ball tank 147 by a partition wall (in this embodiment, two rows). A ball alignment rail member 148 that is guided while being aligned to the downstream side, and a ball passage cover member 156 that has a curved rail portion and guides a ball from the curved rail portion, and wins a prize. An intermediate component provided with a ball payout device 154 for paying out the original winning ball (in this embodiment, the rental ball is also paid out, but only the winning ball may be paid out), and the winning mainly driven into the game board 6 On the mechanism plate main body 141 such that a configuration for processing a hit ball including a ball and a lower component portion provided with a configuration for guiding a winning ball to the hit ball supply tray 3 and the surplus ball receiving tray 4 constitute an opening window. Integrated with It is formed.

  A ball leveling member 149 is swingably suspended from the upper part on the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148, and the ball flowing down on the ball alignment rail member 148 in two upper and lower stages is a ball leveling member 149. One stage is formed by the action of a buried weight (no symbol).

  The mechanism plate main body 141 constitutes an upper part and a right side part (viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a left side part (viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and a lower part of the mechanism plate main body 141, respectively. The upper plate 142, the left side plate 143, and the lower plate 144 are connected by mounting screws. The upper plate 142, the left side plate 143, and the lower plate 144 in the present embodiment are formed of a green transparent polycarbonate resin into which a green pigment is encapsulated in order to improve wear resistance. The transparent color is green and transparent, but if it is not colored, it will become yellowish and transparent, and the aesthetics will be impaired (it will feel dirty with cigarette dust). That has been solved.

  A frame external terminal plate 103 having an external connection terminal to which a signal line to the outside is connected is attached to the upper part on the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148 in the upper component. The mounting portion of the frame external terminal plate 103 is recessed so that the protruding portion of the solder surface does not come into contact. As an external connection terminal provided on the frame external terminal plate 103, as a connector for connecting a signal line between the outside (for example, the management computer) and the pachinko gaming machine 1, a connector for outputting the number of prize balls, Connectors for outputting signals from the first and second door opening switches 105 and 106 are provided.

  In addition, a first door opening switch 105 and a second door opening switch 106 are provided on the upper left part of the prize ball tank 147 and the back surface of the mechanism board 140 at the upper right part of the frame external terminal plate 103, respectively. . The first door opening switch 105 in the present embodiment detects that the glass door frame 2 and the front frame are opened, and that the mechanism plate 140 and the front frame are opened. The second door opening switch 106 detects that the front frame and the outer frame are opened. The first door opening switch 105 and the second door opening switch 106 are connected to the frame external terminal plate 103. Thus, since the 1st door opening switch 105 and the 2nd door opening switch 106 are provided, the open state of an outer frame, a front frame, and the glass door frame 2 can be confirmed by an external device etc. The wiring of the first door opening switch 105 and the second door opening switch 106 is connected to an audio frame lamp board 70 to be described later, connected to the main board 31 via the effect control board 80, and The open state of the outer frame, the front frame, and the glass door frame 2 may be notified by controlling lighting of the decoration lamp 17 and the like by the audio frame lamp substrate 70 based on the information signal from the main substrate 31.

  Next, the structure of the intermediate structure part located in the upper board 142 is demonstrated. A ball passage (not shown) through which a sphere passes is formed on the surface side of the intermediate component. This ball removal passage communicates with a downstream portion of a ball removal passage, which will be described later, and guides a ball waiting on the ball alignment rail member 148 and the prize ball tank 147 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed). This will lead to the recovery of the island. The guidance of the sphere to the ball passage is performed by releasing a ball removal stopper (not shown) provided on the ball passage cover member 156.

  A ball passage cover member 156 having a curve rail portion and a ball passage portion connected to the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148 described above is attached to the upper portion of the intermediate component portion. The curved rail portion of the ball passage cover member 156 branches the sphere flowing down from the ball alignment rail member 148 into either the above-described ball removal passage or a ball passage (not shown) that guides the ball to the ball dispensing device 154. is there. A ball dispensing device 154 is disposed on the downstream side of the curved rail portion.

  On the downstream side of the ball passage cover member 156, the ball break switch 157 is detachable by a locking piece at a position where it can be detected that 27 to 28 game balls are present between the ball payout device 154 and the ball discharge device 154. It is installed. The ball break switch 157 inputs a signal to the payout control board 100 and the main board 31 when the ball is no longer detected, and stops the operation of a payout motor 115 (to be described later) of a ball payout device 154 to be described later. Dispensing the ball is disabled. Further, below the ball passage cover member 156, a ball payout device 154 for paying out winning balls and balls is attached.

  Next, the lower component (lower plate 144) of the mechanism plate 140 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the lower component portion is provided with a payout control board box 131 for receiving the payout control board 100 on the right side when viewed from the back, and receives the power supply board 910 on the left side when viewed from the back. A power supply board box 130 is attached. The payout control board box 131 is also configured similarly to the structure of the main board box 136 described above. That is, the payout control board box 131 is formed by covering the payout control board box base with the payout control board box cover, inserting and screwing caulking screws into the caulking portions provided on the left and right sides, and sealing with caulking caps from above. It is configured so that it cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is cut (none is shown). Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the payout control board box 131 is opened based on whether or not the crimping portion is cut.

  A winning ball guiding path (not shown) for guiding a winning ball and an out ball are guided to the front side (the inner side of the mechanism board main body 141 facing the game board 6) of the lower component to which the payout control board box 131 is attached. An out ball passage (not shown) is formed, and on the back side of the lower component (outside of the mechanism plate main body 141), a prize ball passage, a communication passage, an excess ball passage are formed, and a downstream portion of the ball removal passage is also formed. Is formed. A locking device 128 that locks the glass door frame 2 to the front frame and locks the front frame to the outer frame is provided on the left side of the power supply board box 130.

  Next, the configuration of the right side portion (hereinafter referred to as the right side lower component) as viewed from the back of the lower component of the mechanism plate 140 will be described. Although not shown, a prize ball passage is formed on one side upper part of the lower right component part of the mechanism plate 140, and an upper plate communication port is formed at the lower end of the prize ball passage. The upper plate communication port guides the prize ball to the hitting ball supply tray 3 provided on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A communication passage is formed at one side of the upper plate communication port, and an excess ball passage is connected downstream of the communication passage.

  However, when a lot of prize balls based on the winnings are paid out and the batting ball supply tray 3 is filled with the prize balls, and finally the ball reaches the upper plate communication port and the prize balls continue to be paid out, It is guided to the surplus ball passage through the passage, and then discharged to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the connecting rod. When the award ball continues to be paid out, the surplus ball receiving tray 4 is also full, but when it reaches the full tank detection lever portion provided on one side wall of the surplus ball passage, the full tank detection lever is pressed. As a result, the full switch 158 (see FIG. 5) is turned ON, and the driving of the payout motor 115 of the ball payout device 154 is stopped, thereby disabling the payout operation of the winning ball and the rental ball. At this time, the driving of the firing motor 94 of the hit ball launching device 93 is not stopped, but may be stopped.

  The power supply board box 130 houses therein a power supply board 910 that generates a plurality of power supplies having different voltages. The power supply board 910 includes a power switch 914 for turning on and off the entire pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main board 31, payout control board 100, and production control board 80. A clear switch 921 (see also FIG. 8), a tube fuse, and the like are mounted for clearing the data stored in the backup RAM provided in FIG. The power supply board 910 is mounted with a power connector to which the power cord 117 is connected. The voltage supplied by the power cord 117 is a voltage of AC24V, and the plurality of voltages generated by the power supply board 910 are four types of DC30V, DC24V, DC12V, and DC5V. (However, AC 24V is also supplied to the other boards.) The power supply board 910 is not supplied with driving power to the CPUs of the main board 31, the payout control board 100, and the effect control board 80. In order to back up (hold) the storage contents of the RAM of each substrate 31, 80, 100, backup power is supplied to each substrate 31, 80, 100. The main board 31 is configured to perform a backup process by outputting a power-off signal from the power board 910. It should be noted that the payout control board 100 and the effect control board 80 are similarly backed up. The backup processing on the main board 31, the payout control board 100, and the effect control board 80 will be described in detail later.

  On the front side of the mechanism plate main body 141 of the lower right component part (side contacting the game board 6), a winning ball guiding path (not shown) for guiding a winning ball and an out ball path (not shown) for guiding an out ball. And are formed. Above the winning ball guiding passage is a winning ball drop entrance (not shown), which receives the winning ball released from the winning ball guiding cover body, and guides the received winning ball to the winning ball The passage is guided toward one side, led from a communication port (not shown) formed in the mechanism plate main body 141 to the back side of the mechanism plate main body 141, and further from the communication port to the downstream portion of the ball removal passage (illustrated). Do not). The downstream portion of the ball removal passage is bent in an inverted L shape along the outer peripheral edge of the lower right component, and is formed on the right side of the surplus ball passage formed on the substantially central back side of the lower component. It finally joins the discharge passage. Accordingly, the winning ball received from the winning ball dropping entrance is guided to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the winning ball guiding passage, the communication port, the downstream portion of the ball discharging passage, and the confluence discharging passage. .

  The out ball taken in from the out port 15 of the game board 6 is guided to an out ball discharge passage (not shown) engraved on the back surface of the game board 6 and further passes through an out ball communication port (not shown). Then, it is led to the above-mentioned out ball passage, and is led to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the communication port and the junction discharge passage. In other words, the above-described merged discharge passage is configured to join all of the ball from the downstream portion of the ball removal passage, the out ball from the out ball passage, and the winning ball from the winning ball guide passage to guide the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside. It is.

  Next, the operation key 190 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the configuration of the operation key 190. The operation key 190 includes a determination key 191, an upward key 192, and a downward key 193 constituted by a push type detection switch. The enter key 191, the up direction key 192, and the down direction key 193 are effective when the operation screen as described later is displayed on the third variable display device 8C or the fourth variable display device 8D. Become. When the up direction key 192 is operated, a display is performed in which the position of the operation button selected and displayed among the plurality of operation buttons displayed as an image on the operation screen is moved upward on the screen. Further, when the down key 193 is operated, a display is performed in which the position of the operation button selected and displayed among the plurality of operation buttons displayed as an image on the operation screen is moved downward on the screen. When the enter key 191 is operated, it is determined that the operation button selected and displayed among the plurality of operation buttons displayed as an image on the operation screen is actually operated. Note that an operation screen may be displayed by operating the enter key 191 when the decorative symbols are not variably displayed on the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D.

  As described above, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Next, a circuit configuration that is wire-connected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the main board 31, various control boards, and electrical components.

  On the main board 31, a basic circuit 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, and a game control microcomputer 560 including a CPU 56 that performs control operations in accordance with the program. And an I / O port unit 57 that transmits a control signal (effect control command) to the effect control board 80 and the like. In this embodiment, the ROM 54, RAM 55, and I / O port section 57 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to have at least the RAM 55 built in, and the ROM 54 and the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached or built in.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment has a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) used to generate a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be set to disable interrupt by software. And an interrupt terminal (INT terminal) used to generate an interrupt (external interrupt; maskable interrupt that can be disabled by software) from outside the CPU 56. However, this embodiment does not use non-maskable interrupts and external interrupts. Therefore, the NMI terminal and the INT terminal are pulled up to VCC (+5 V) through resistors. Therefore, the input level of the NMI terminal and the INT terminal is always high, and the input level of the NMI terminal and the INT terminal falls from the high level to the low level due to noise or the like as compared with the case where the terminal is open. The possibility of entering a state is reduced.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, since the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to CPUs mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls, and the like are stored in the backup RAM. Note that the data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power supply is restored after a power failure or the like. . Further, data according to the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of award balls not paid out are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  The main board 31 has a clear signal indicating that the clear switch 921 for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM has been operated from the power supply board 910, and a power cut-off indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. A signal and a system reset signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a reset signal) used as a game control permission signal (a signal for making the CPU operable) to the game control microcomputer 560 are input.

  Signals from the switches 21, 22a and 22b provided on the game board 6 are input to the main board 31 via the switch relay board 95, and signals from the full switch 158 and the ball break switch 157 are supplied to the payout control board. 100 is input. The signal from the ball break switch 157 may be configured not to be input to the main board 31. Similarly, the signal from the full tank switch 158 may be configured not to be input to the main board 31. Further, a signal from a payout number count switch 116 (only a reference numeral is shown in FIG. 6) mounted on the ball payout device 154 is input to the main board 31 via the payout control board 100.

  The first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b are directly connected to the main board 31, and signals from the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b are directly input (however, other The number of prize balls based on the switches 21, 22a and 22b is relatively large, for example, seven, whereas the number of prize balls based on the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b is A relatively small number, eg, 4). This is because wiring from the first starting port switch 20a and the second starting port switch 20b is directly connected to the main board 31, and an unauthorized circuit board is incorporated in the middle (called a hanging board or the like). This is for facilitating discovery of whether or not) is connected.

  Based on the input signals from the switches 21, 22a, 22b provided on the game board 6 among the input signals described above, the main board 31 drives and controls the solenoids 23, 24a, 24b provided on the game board 6, An electric decoration signal and a sound effect signal corresponding to the gaming state are output to the voice frame lamp substrate 70 via the peripheral command relay substrate 108 and the effect control substrate 80, and further, the display states of the variable display devices 8A to 8D are controlled. Are output to the symbol relay board 84 and the effect control board 80, and various game information is output to the board external terminal board 104. The effect control board 80 controls the variable display operation of the variable display devices 8C and 8D according to the type of information signal from the main board 31, and further exchanges information signals with the audio frame lamp board 70. To do. The peripheral command relay board 108 relays information signals output to the effect control board 80.

  The voice frame lamp board 70 performs lighting control of the game effect lamps 40 to 42 attached to the glass door frame 2 in accordance with the type of the illumination signal input from the main board 31. The voice frame lamp board 70 controls the speaker 30 according to the type of the sound effect signal input from the main board 31. Further, the voice frame lamp board 70 performs lighting control of the decoration lamp 17 attached to the game board 6 via the lamp driver board 35 in accordance with the type of the electric decoration signal input from the main board 31. The voice frame lamp board 70 lights various game effect lamps according to the game state (variable display pattern, normal game state, time shortening state, game state such as probability variation state, variable display, etc.). While performing control, drive control of the game sound from the speaker 30 is performed. The lamp driver board 35 relays the connection with the voice frame lamp board 70 for controlling the lighting state of the decoration lamp 17 provided on the game board 6.

  The main substrate 31 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) to the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B via the symbol relay substrate 84, and the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device. The special symbol display control in 8B is performed, and the lighting control of the start memory LED 9 is performed. Thereby, a control board for a special symbol display device equipped with a driver circuit and a microcomputer is provided between the main substrate 31 and the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B. Compared with the case where the display control of the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B is performed by the control board or the like based on the control signal (drive signal), the result of the big hit determination can be surely displayed. .

  Further, the main board 31 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) to the normal symbol display 10 via the symbol relay board 84 and performs display control of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10. Further, the main board 31 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) to the normal symbol start memory LED 11 via the symbol relay board 84, and controls the lighting of the normal symbol start memory LED 11.

  The effect control board 80 includes a CPU (effect control CPU 118a shown in FIG. 7), a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown), an I / O port unit ((input ports 668 and 669 shown in FIG. 7, input / output). Effect control microcomputer 118 (an example of an electrical component control microcomputer, see FIG. 7, also referred to as effect control means), which is composed of port 671 and the like, is mounted, and effect control input from main board 31 In accordance with the type of command, display control of decorative symbols in the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D is performed.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 operates in accordance with a program stored in the ROM, and when receiving the effect control command from the main board 31, the variable display device (the third variable display device 8C or the third variable display device 8C or the third variable display device 8) corresponds to the received effect control command. 4 variable display device 8D). Specifically, display control of the variable display unit is performed by a VDP 119 (see FIG. 7) having a display control function for displaying an image and a high-speed drawing function. The effect control microcomputer 118 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data frequently used among images displayed on the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D, specifically, a person, a monster, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like. It is for keeping.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 118 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 119. The VDP 119 operates based on the data input from the effect control microcomputer 118. In this embodiment, a VDP 119 that controls display of the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D is mounted on the effect control board 80. Each of the VDPs 119 has a two-dimensional address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 118 and maps to the space.

  The VDP 119 generates image data to be displayed on the variable display device (the third variable display device 8C or the fourth variable display device 8D) according to the effect control command received according to the character image data, and the VDP 119 is developed in the VRAM. . A RAM is a frame buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP 119.

  Further, operation keys 190 (decision key 191, upward key 192, and downward key 193) and launch ball sensor 194 are connected to effect control board 80.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 collects data for displaying the game history information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a specific command described later among the received effect control commands. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the production control microcomputer 118 displays various types of information with managers such as store staff of the game store (game room) where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed as the target of use. The game store information screen which is the image to be displayed is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. The game shop information screen corresponds to an operation screen on which operation of the operation key 190 is valid.

  When the game store information screen is displayed, the production control microcomputer 118 performs processing for managing the above-described game history information based on an operation signal output in response to an operation of the operation key 190 by a store clerk or the like. The predetermined process is executed. Further, in a normal time when the third variable display device 8C can variably display decorative symbols (for example, a state other than during execution of the big hit gaming state), an operation signal output in response to the operation of the operation key 190 by the player Based on the above, a player information screen, which is an image displayable image for displaying various kinds of information with the player as a user, is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. The state in which the decorative display variable display is executed in the third variable display device 8C, and the state in which the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first variable display device 8A, In this case, the player information screen may be displayed on the fourth variable display device 8D. In this case, in the state in which the decorative display variable display is being executed on the fourth variable display device 8D, The user information screen may not be displayed. Further, the player information screen corresponds to an operation screen on which the operation of the operation key 190 is valid. When the player information screen is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the aforementioned game history information based on an operation signal output in response to the operation of the operation key 190 by the player. The predetermined process is executed.

  Next, the payout control board 100 outputs a payout stop signal to the ball payout device 154 based on the full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 as shown in FIG. The full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 31 via the payout control board 100. When a full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 31, a full tank signal is output from the main board 31 to the audio frame lamp board 70 to display and drive a predetermined lamp or LED. May be notified. Further, since the full tank signal from the full switch 158 is output to the payout control board 100, for example, an error indicator on the payout control board 100 or the like may be notified.

  Further, the main board 31 outputs a prize ball control signal to the payout control board 100 based on input signals from the switches 20 a, 20 b, 22 a, and 22 b except the gate switch 21 provided on the game board 6. The payout control board 100 adds the number of prize balls based on the prize ball control signal to the number of unpaid, and drives the ball payout device 154 to pay out the number of prize balls. Further, based on an input signal from the payout number count switch 116, the payout control board 100 subtracts the payout number from the unpaid number. Further, the payout control board 100 displays and drives the prize ball lamp 51 based on the input of the prize ball control signal and notifies the fact.

  Further, the payout control board 100 outputs a payout stop signal to the ball payout device 154 based on the ball cut switch signal from the ball cut switch 157 to stop the driving of the payout motor 115. At that time, the payout control board 100 drives the ball break lamp 52 in a predetermined manner.

  When either the full tank switch 158 or the ball break switch 157 is turned ON, a payout stop signal (payout stop command) is output from the payout control board 100 so that a prize ball or the like is not paid out. If both switches 158 and 157 are OFF, a payout enable signal (payout stop release command) may be output. In addition, when there is unpaid in place of the prize ball lamp 51, an unpaid notification lamp or the like that lights up may be provided.

  Only the switch input for controlling the game operation and the switch input for controlling the payout operation of the prize ball are input to the main board 31. The relationship between the main board 31 and other control boards excluding the payout control board 100 In FIG. 1, the communication relationship is unidirectional from the main board 31 to another control board. For this reason, there is an advantage that an illegal processing program is incorporated in another control board and cannot be executed even if an illegal process is performed on the main board 31, and a part of the control of the main board 31 is not performed. Since the control board is in charge, the burden on the main board 31 can be reduced and the inspection of the main board 31 can be facilitated.

  Further, the payout control board 100 includes a signal from the payout sensor board 114, the payout motor 115, and the payout number count switch 116 mounted on the ball payout device 154, and a full signal from the full tank switch 158 as described above. Or, a ball break signal from the ball break switch 157 is input. The payout sensor board 114 is a board provided with a payout motor position sensor, which is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 115. By this payout motor position sensor, The rotational position of the dispensing motor 115 can be detected in order to reliably perform the dispensing operation. From the payout sensor board 114, a detection signal of the payout motor position sensor is output.

  Further, an interface board 101 that relays signals from the card unit device 50 and the balance display board 102 is connected to the payout control board 100, and a ball rental switch 98 and a return switch 99 mounted on the balance display board 102. And various information are input from the card unit device 50. Furthermore, as described above, a prize ball control signal is input to the payout control board 100 from the main board 31. Among the input signals described above, the payout control board 100 is based on the input signal from the payout sensor board 114, and the stop position of the payout motor 115 in the payout operation of the lending and winning balls, that is, the ball payout member of the ball payout device 154. It is possible to accurately control the stop position and detect whether or not the ball dispensing member is operating. Further, based on an input signal from the payout number count switch 116, the payout control board 100 drives and controls the payout motor 115 so as to pay out the exact payout number of the rented and winning balls, and the frame external terminal plate 103. Information on the number of balls rented (25 pulses for 100 yen is 1 pulse). Note that lending is performed by transmitting and receiving various signals between the payout control board 100 and the card unit device 50 via the interface board 101 and driving the ball payout apparatus 154. Various signals transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the card unit device 50 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the payout control board 100 executes a prize ball payout operation or pays out a prize ball based on a prize ball control signal from the main board 31, a ball break signal and a full tank signal directly inputted from the switch, and the like. The operation is stopped and executed. The input signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full tank switch 158 connected to the frame external terminal board 103 are output to the external hall management computer or the like as ball break information or full tank information.

  In the hit ball launching device 93 described above, a launch board 107 on which a circuit for driving the launch motor 94 is mounted is provided. Note that the operation handle 5 of this embodiment has a touch connected to a single firing switch 109 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 6) and a touch ring 110 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 6) for stopping the driving of the firing motor. Wiring (not shown) is assembled, and the resilience can be adjusted according to the operation amount. Signals from the touch sensor and the single firing switch 109 are transmitted from the operation handle 5 to the firing substrate 107. Then, in response to the operation of the operation handle 5 by the player, a drive signal for driving the firing motor 94 is output from the firing substrate 107 to the firing motor 94. The firing motor 94 is driven in accordance with a drive signal from the firing substrate 107. In the firing substrate 107, when the signal from the touch sensor circuit indicates an off state, the driving of the firing motor 94 is stopped.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board 31 and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 produces an effect control command using eight signal lines CD0 to CD7 for transmitting the effect control signal. Transmit to the control board 80. An effect control INT signal signal line for transmitting and receiving a strobe signal is also wired between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main board 31 is connected to wiring from the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b. The main board 31 has a first special variable winning ball device 13A that is the first grand prize opening, a second special variable winning ball device 13B that is the second big winning hole, and the winning prize of the game balls to the other winning holes. Wirings from various switches for detecting etc. are also connected. Further, on the main board 31, a solenoid 23 for an ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes the ordinary variable winning ball device 12B, a solenoid 24a that opens and closes the first special variable winning ball device 13A, and a second special variable winning ball device 13B. The wiring to the solenoid 24b is connected.

  The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58, and an output circuit 59. The game control microcomputer 560 operates in accordance with a clock circuit 501, a reset controller 502 that functions as system reset means, random number circuits 503a and 503b, a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that is used as a work memory, and a program. CPU 56, CTC 504 for sending an interrupt request signal to CPU, and I / O port unit 57 are incorporated.

The clock circuit 501 outputs a system clock signal to the CPU 56, and outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined period generated by dividing the system clock signal by 2 ⁷ (= 128) to the random number circuits 503a and 503b. . When a low level signal is input for a predetermined period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and the random number circuits 503a and 503b to reset the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits 503a and 503b having different ranges of random value values that can be generated. The random number circuit 503a is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit 503a has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 4095). The random number circuit 503b is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo-random number. The 16-bit random number circuit 503b has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated in 16 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 65535). In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits is described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include three or more random number circuits. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are comprehensively expressed, or when indicating either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, This is called a random number circuit 503.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 100 and the ball payout device 154. As shown in FIG. 6, the payout control board 100 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 660 including an payout control CPU 659 (an example of an electric component control microcomputer, also referred to as payout control means). In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 660 is a one-chip microcomputer and has a built-in RAM that stores at least the number of payouts. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 660. At least a part of the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 660 is backed up by a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 910. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all RAM areas are backed up. Therefore, even when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the storage contents of the RAM are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The

  The detection signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full switch 158 are input to the I / O port 661d of the payout control board 100 via the sunpack relay board 111. Further, the sunpack relay board 111 is connected to the frame external terminal plate 103 by a connector. The frame external terminal board 103 includes a connector for outputting the number of prize balls as a connector for connecting a signal line between the outside (for example, a management computer) and the pachinko gaming machine 1, and first and second doors. A connector for outputting signals from the open switches 105 and 106 is provided as an external connection terminal.

  The detection signal from the payout number count switch 116 and the payout sensor board 114 mounted on the ball payout device 154 is input to the I / O port 661c of the payout control board 100 via the payout relay board 113. The payout control microcomputer 660 performs a process of subtracting the unpaid number stored in the RAM based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a signal for driving the payout motor 115 via the payout relay board 113 when there is an unpaid number. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a payout stop signal from the I / O port 661c to the payout relay board 113 when a signal indicating that the ball is full or full is input to the I / O port 661b. The payout relay board 113 stops the drive of the payout motor 115 when receiving the payout stop signal.

  The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a ball break signal to the plastic frame relay board 112 via the I / O port 661b when a signal indicating ball break is input to the I / O port 661d. The plastic frame relay board 112 performs control to turn on the ball break lamp 52 based on the ball break signal. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a prize ball signal to the plastic frame relay board 112 via the I / O port 661b based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The plastic frame relay board 112 performs control to turn on the prize ball lamp 51 based on the prize ball signal. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a firing stop signal to the plastic frame relay board 112 via the I / O port 661b when a signal indicating that the ball is full or full is input to the I / O port 661d. You may make it do. In this case, the plastic frame relay board 112 may output a firing motor disabling signal to the launch board 107 so that the launch motor 94 cannot be driven.

  In addition, when a game ball is won at the winning opening, a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is output from the output circuit 662 of the main board 31 (turns on). Also, when the game control microcomputer 560 is started up (when the operation is started), a payout start command (payout start command) is output. Then, a prize ball REQ signal (prize ball request signal) for instructing to take in a prize ball control signal or a payout activation command is output (turned on).

  In this embodiment, the winning ball control signal and the payout activation command are transmitted through the same signal line. The winning ball control signal and the payout activation command are composed of 5-bit data (binary 5-digit data) and are output through five signal lines. Note that the ON state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state where the signal is significant, and turning ON means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, when the prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls and the prize ball REQ signal are turned on, the microcomputer 660 is instructed to recognize the number of prizes indicated by the prize ball control signal. Means that.

  The prize ball control signal and the payout activation command are input to the I / O port 661g via the input circuit 663A. The prize ball REQ signal is input to a maskable interrupt terminal (hereinafter also simply referred to as an interrupt terminal) of the payout control CPU 659. The payout control CPU 659 inputs a prize ball control signal via the I / O port 661g in an interrupt process based on the prize ball REQ signal being inputted to the interrupt terminal, and the number of prize ball control signals indicated by the prize ball control signal. In order to pay out the game ball, the ball paying device 154 is controlled to be driven. A connection confirmation signal indicating that the main board 31 is connected is also output from the output circuit 662 of the main board 31.

  When the payout control microcomputer 660 accepts a payout command signal, it sends a command acceptance signal to the main board 31. The command acceptance signal is transmitted to the main board 31 via the output port 662h of the payout control board 100 and the output circuit 663B. Then, in the main board 31, the data is input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 666 and the I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, the command acceptance signal is transmitted when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 100 also includes a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from the power supply board 910, a clear signal indicating that the clear switch for clearing the contents of the RAM has been operated, A reset signal used as a payout control permission signal (a signal for making the CPU operable) for the payout control microcomputer 660 is input to the input port 661a.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 664 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 661f. A detection signal from the error release switch 665 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 661e of the payout control board 100. The error cancel switch 665 is used for canceling the error state by software reset.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit device 50 installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the card unit device 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 96, a ball lending display LED 97, a ball lending switch 98 and a return switch 99 provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3 are connected to the interface board 101. The frequency display LED 96 displays the frequency that can be lent as a ball, and the ball lending display LED 97 indicates that the ball can be lent.

  In response to the player's operation, the card board device 50 is given a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 98 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 99 has been operated. It is done. Further, a card balance display signal indicating a balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit device 50 to the interface board 101. Between the card unit device 50 and the payout control board 100, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 661i and the output port 661j. An interface board 101 is interposed between the card unit device 50 and the payout control board 100. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit device 50 and the payout control board 100 via the interface board 101 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, the VL signal is either a launch-permitted state in which launching is permitted for launching a game ball by the hitting ball launcher 93 or a launch-inhibited state in which launching of a game ball by the hitting ball launcher 93 is prohibited on the launch board 107. Used to select the state. For this reason, on the dispensing control board 100, the signal path (signal line, signal line) of the VL signal is dispensed via the first signal path L1 output to the launch board 107 via the output port 661k and the input port 661i. A branch is formed to the second signal path L2 for transmission to the control microcomputer 660. That is, on the payout control board 100, wiring as branching means for branching the signal path of the VL signal into the first signal path L1 and the second signal path L2 is provided. As a result, the VL signal is transmitted from the card unit device 50 to the payout control board 100 and also to the launch board 107 via the payout control board 100.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 100 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit device 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 660 determines whether the card unit device 50 is connected or not based on the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit device 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 100. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 100.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 660 raises the EXS signal to the card unit device 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit device 50, drives the payout motor 115 to play a predetermined number of balls. Pay to the person. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 660 causes the EXS signal to the card unit device 50 to fall. Thereafter, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 560 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit device 50 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit device 50 is supplied from the payout control board 100. That is, power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit device 50 is performed via the payout control board 100 and the interface board 101. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit device 50 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit device 50 arranged in the interface board 101, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is applied to the card unit device 50. It is prevented from being supplied.

  The payout control CPU 659 used in this embodiment generates a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) used for generating a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and a maskable interrupt. And an interrupt terminal (INT terminal) used for the purpose. However, this embodiment does not use non-maskable interrupts and external interrupts. Therefore, the NMI terminal and the INT terminal are pulled up to VCC (+5 V) through resistors. The maskable interrupt is an interrupt that can be controlled so that no interrupt is generated by software. An interrupt based on a signal input to the interrupt terminal is also called an external interrupt.

  In the launch board 107, a detection signal from the touch ring 110 (hereinafter referred to as a touch sensor detection signal), a detection signal from the single firing switch 109 (hereinafter referred to as a single firing switch detection signal), and an interface from the card unit device 50. A VL signal transmitted via the substrate 101 and the dispensing control substrate 100 is input. The launch board 107 is equipped with a launch motor drive circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the launch motor 94. The firing motor drive circuit generates a drive signal when the touch sensor detection signal indicates an on state in response to the operation handle 5 being operated, while driving when the touch sensor detection signal indicates an off state. Stop signal generation. Further, the drive signal generation circuit 95a stops the generation of the drive signal even when the touch sensor detection signal indicates the on state when the single firing switch detection signal indicates the on state. Further, when the VL signal is in the off state, the emission is prohibited, and the emission is permitted and prohibited depending on whether the VL signal is input.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the effect control board 80 and the voice frame lamp board 70. As shown in FIG. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 118a in the effect control microcomputer 118 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown), and is transmitted from the main board 31 via the peripheral command relay board 108. In response to the capture signal (effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the peripheral command relay board 108, the input driver 667, and the input port 668. Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 causes the VDP (video display processor) 119 to perform display control of the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D using the LCD based on the effect control command. The VDP 119 is sometimes called a GCL (graphic controller LSI).

  The peripheral command relay board 108 allows signals (effect control signal and effect control INT signal constituting the effect control command) input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (effect control board). A unidirectional circuit 108a is mounted as signal input blocking means (which does not allow signals to pass in the direction from 80 to the main board 31). For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit 108a. FIG. 7 illustrates a diode. In addition, the unidirectional circuit 108 a is provided for each signal line passing through the peripheral command relay board 108. A signal from the effect control board 80, a signal input to the effect control board 80 (an operation signal from the operation key 190 and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194), and a voice frame lamp board 70 connected to the effect control board 80 A signal from (a board not connected to the main board 31 is also referred to as a peripheral board) is not transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 due to the presence of the peripheral command relay board 108. Therefore, the signal input path from the outside to the game control microcomputer 560 is limited, and the possibility of an illegal act of sending an illegal signal to the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. Further, when the peripheral command relay board 108 is attached in such a manner that the back surface thereof can be visually recognized, the back surface of the peripheral command relay board 108 can be easily visually recognized. It is possible to easily find out that an illegal act of illegally inputting a signal to the microcomputer 560 has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the unidirectional circuit 108a is provided on the peripheral command relay board 108 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the unidirectional circuit 108a may be provided on the main board 31. Further, the effect control board 80 may be provided. That is, the unidirectional circuit 108a may be configured to be provided in a place where an illegal signal can be prevented from being input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 receives an operation signal from the operation key 190 (191, 192, 193) and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194 via the input port 669.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 118 controls the sound control command for controlling the sound emitted from the speaker 30 to the sound frame lamp board 70 via the input / output port 671, the game effect lamps 40 to 42, the decoration. A lamp control command for controlling the lighting state of the lamp 17 is output.

  In the voice frame lamp board 70, a voice frame lamp control microcomputer (MPU) 70a including a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM is connected via a voice driver circuit 673 based on control data stored in a ROM corresponding to a voice control command. The speaker 30 is controlled. The voice frame lamp control microcomputer 70a controls the game effect lamps 40 to 42 via the frame lamp driver circuit 672 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the lamp control command. Further, the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 70a sends a drive signal for controlling the decoration lamp 17 via the bus driver 674 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the lamp control command. 35.

  In the lamp driver board 35, the decoration lamp 17 is controlled via the output port 676 and the decoration lamp driver circuit 677 based on the drive signal output from the audio frame lamp board 70 and input from the bus driver 675. The lamp driver board 35 is further provided with an expansion port 678 so that other effect devices can be driven.

  The lamp control command and the voice control command in the present embodiment are two-way communication (a response signal is transmitted from the command receiving side to the sending side) between the effect control microcomputer 118 and the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 70a. Communication).

  The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 70 a mounted on the voice frame lamp board 70. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the audio frame lamp substrate 70 and further via the input / output port 671 mounted on the effect control board 80. The power-off signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the audio frame lamp board 70 and further via the input / output port 671 mounted on the effect control board 80.

  In addition, at least a part of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 118 is backed up by a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 910. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a part of the RAM area (hereinafter referred to as a backup area) is backed up. Therefore, even when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the production control microcomputer 118 does not operate for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The stored contents of the RAM backup area are saved. Note that the entire RAM area of the effect control microcomputer 118 may be backed up by a backup power source.

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 910 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the power supply substrate 910. The power supply board 910 is provided with a power switch 914 for executing or shutting off power supply to each electrical component control board and mechanism component in the gaming machine. Note that the power switch 914 may be provided outside the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine. When the power switch 914 is in a closed state (on state), an AC power supply (AC 24 V) is applied to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 911. The transformer 911 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the inside of the power supply board 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. A varistor 918 as an overvoltage protection circuit is installed on the input side of the transformer 911.

  The power supply board 910 is installed independently of the electrical component control board (the main board 31, the payout control board 100, the effect control board 80, etc.), and generates a voltage used by each board and the mechanical parts in the pachinko gaming machine 1. . In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VLP (DC + 24V), VDD (DC + 12V), and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. Further, a capacitor 916 serving as a storage holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM, is charged from DC + 5V (VCC), that is, a power supply line for driving an IC or the like on each substrate. Further, a backflow prevention diode 917 is inserted between the + 5V line and the backup + 5V (VBB) line. Note that VSL is generated by rectifying and boosting AC 24 V with a rectifying element in the rectifying and smoothing circuit 915. VSL is a solenoid driving power source. VLP is a lamp lighting voltage, and is generated by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier in the rectifier circuit 912.

  The DC-DC converter 913 serving as a power supply voltage generation unit has one or a plurality of regulator ICs (two regulator ICs 924A and 924B are shown in FIG. 8), and generates VDD and VCC based on VSL. Relatively large capacitors 923A and 923B are connected to the input sides of the regulator ICs (switching regulators) 924A and 924B. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is stopped, the direct current voltages such as VSL, VDD, VCC, etc., decrease relatively slowly.

  As shown in FIG. 8, AC24V output from the transformer 911 is supplied to the connector 922B as it is. The VLP is supplied to the connector 922C. VCC, VDD and VSL are supplied to connectors 922A, 922B and 922C.

  The cable connected to the connector 922A is connected to the main board 31. The cable connected to the connector 922B is connected to the payout control board 100. The cable connected to the connector 922C is connected to the audio frame lamp board 70. Then, each voltage supplied from the connector 922C is supplied to the effect control board 80 and the lamp driver board 35 via the voice frame lamp board 70. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, data is backed up on each of the main board 31, the payout control board 100, and the effect control board 80. Therefore, VBB is also supplied to the connectors 922A, 922B, and 922C. Here, the VBB from the connector 922C is supplied to the RAM (not shown) of the effect control board 80 via the audio frame lamp board 70.

  In addition, a clear switch 921 having a push button structure is mounted on the power supply board 910. When the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level (ON state) clear signal is output and transmitted to the main board 31 and the payout control board 100 via the connector 922A and the connector 922B. If the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level (off state) signal is output. The clear switch 921 may have a configuration other than the push button structure. Further, in the gaming machine, the clear switch 921 may be provided in other places as long as it is a board other than the power supply board 910 such as the payout control board 100 or the rear side of the gaming machine.

  Further, the power supply board 910 generates a reset signal as a system reset signal for the microcomputer mounted on the electric component control board, and outputs a power cut-off signal. An output driver circuit 925 that amplifies the reset signal and outputs it to the connectors 922A, 922B, and 922C, and amplifies the power-off signal and outputs it to the connector 922A and the connector 922B is mounted. The reset signal is used as an operation stop signal that stops (inhibits) the operation of the microcomputer at the reset level, and is used as an operation enable signal that enables the operation of the microcomputer at the non-reset level. In the present embodiment, a reset signal via the audio frame lamp board 70 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118. However, the input pattern of the system reset signal to the production control microcomputer 118 is not limited to this. For example, an input pattern in which a system reset signal via the main board 31 or the payout control board 100 is input may be used.

  The power monitoring circuit 920 is a circuit that realizes a voltage drop monitoring unit that outputs a power-off signal and a reset signal generation unit that generates a system reset signal. Note that the voltage drop monitoring unit and the reset signal generating unit may be configured by separate circuits. A commercially available power failure monitoring reset module IC can be used as the power monitoring circuit 920. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal when a period during which a predetermined voltage (for example, + 24V) used in the gaming machine becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value (for example, + 5V) continues for a predetermined time (for example, 56 ms). . Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). Further, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the system reset signal to a low level when, for example, VCC becomes +4.5 V or less.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 920 is not limited to determining whether or not the voltage has become a predetermined value or less by determining whether or not the period in which the voltage has become a predetermined value or less has continued for a predetermined time or more. For example, it may be determined whether or not the voltage is equal to or lower than a predetermined value by detecting a pulse obtained by using a general full-wave rectifier circuit including a diode circuit. For example, among pulses obtained by full-wave rectification of an AC wave by a full-wave rectifier circuit, a pulse whose amplitude is greater than or equal to a predetermined value is counted, and when the voltage is not counted for a predetermined period, the voltage is less than or equal to a predetermined value. You may judge that it became.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level on condition that a predetermined period has elapsed since the power-off signal was output (to a low level). . During the predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 100, and the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 80. This is a sufficient time for the computer 118 to execute the power-off process described later. That is, after the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal as a voltage drop signal, the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 660, and the effect control microcomputer 118 execute a power-off process. After completion, an operation stop signal (reset signal low level) is output. In addition, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and VCC exceeds + 4.5V, for example, the system reset signal is set to high level. In this case, after the power-off signal is not output (high level) The system reset signal is set to a high level on the condition that a predetermined period has passed. Therefore, when the microcomputer mounted on each electrical component control board (including the main board 31) starts control according to the program in response to the system reset signal becoming high level, the power-off signal is always turned off. It is in a state.

  The power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the payout control microcomputer 660 via the input port 661a on the payout control board 100 (see FIG. 6). That is, the payout control microcomputer 660 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the input port 661a. In the main board 31, the power-off signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O port unit 57 (see FIG. 4). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the I / O port unit 57. In the effect control board 80, the power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the input / output port 671 (see FIG. 7). That is, the effect control microcomputer 118 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the input / output port 671.

  On the other hand, the reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer 660 via the input port 661a (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 660 can confirm the timing of setting the payout control operation execution state and the payout control operation stop state by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal. The reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560 (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can check the timing of the game control operation execution state and the game control operation stop state by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal. The reset signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the effect control microcomputer 118 via the input / output port 671 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the production control microcomputer 118 can confirm the timing for setting the payout control operation execution state and the timing for setting the payout control operation stop state by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 monitors the output of a power supply having a predetermined potential, and detects a voltage from the outside of the gaming machine (this is a detection condition for stopping the supply of power supplied to the gaming machine from the outside). In the embodiment, it is used that the predetermined DC voltage created from AC 24 V) is equal to or lower than the predetermined value. However, the detection condition is not limited to this, and it is possible to detect that the power from the outside is interrupted. Other conditions may be used. For example, the AC wave itself may be monitored and the AC wave may be detected as a detection condition, or the signal obtained by digitizing the AC wave may be monitored and the AC signal may be stopped when the digital signal becomes flat. May be used as a detection condition.

  Next, the configuration of the random number circuit 503 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 9, the random number circuit 503 includes a counter 521, a comparator 522, a count value permutation changing circuit 523, a clock signal output circuit 524, a count value update signal output circuit 525, a random value read signal output circuit 526, and a random number update. A system selection signal output circuit 527, a selector 528, a random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530, a random value storage circuit 531, an inversion circuit 532, a latch signal generation circuit 533, and a timer circuit 534 are included.

  In this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 determines whether or not the display result of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information is a big hit (for example, the combination of display symbols of the first variable display device 8A is a combination of big hit symbols (specifying A big hit determination random number (random R) is generated for determining whether or not to display the display result. When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the big hit is based on the big hit determination random number (random R) generated by the random number circuit 503, the game state is changed to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. Transition. It should be noted that the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is a probability variation determining random number for determining whether or not the probability variation state in which the probability of becoming a big hit gaming state is improved compared to the normal gaming state, or a variation pattern of a special symbol It may be used as a random number for determination other than the jackpot symbol, such as a random number for determining.

  Note that the big hit determination random number (random R) is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit and put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the big hit gaming state. Probability change random numbers are determined to be a big hit game state when the special game is determined to be a big hit (control to the big hit game state and the game state after the big hit game state will be changed to the probability fluctuation state. Used to determine whether to be a big hit or a normal big hit (a big hit that is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state). Random number. The probability variation end determination random number is a random number used to determine whether or not to end the probability variation state by the probability variation control and shift to the time reduction state. The fixed symbol determining random number is a random number used for determining a fixed symbol of a special symbol in the special symbol game. The random number for reach determination is to determine whether the fixed symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed after reaching the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the fixed symbol does not become a jackpot symbol in the special game. It is a random number for display used to determine whether the symbol is derived and displayed. The random number for determining the variable display pattern is used to determine a variable display pattern to be used in the special figure game and to define a production aspect such as a variable display aspect of the special symbol and a variable display aspect of the decorative pattern in the special figure game. Display random number. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than the above may be used.

  The counter 521 receives the predetermined signal selected by the selector 528 and outputs a count value C in response to the signal input from the selector 528. In this case, the counter 521 inputs a predetermined initial value, cyclically updates the count value C from the initial value to a predetermined final value according to a certain rule, and outputs it. When a notification signal is output from the counter 521, the initial value is updated by the CPU 56.

  In this embodiment, every time a signal is input from the selector 528 (every time a rising edge in the signal from the selector 528 is input), the counter 521 increments the count value C from “0” to “4095” by one. Count up. Further, when the counter 521 counts up the count value C to “4095”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. Then, the CPU 56 inputs a notification signal from the counter 521 and updates the initial value. Then, the counter 521 counts up the count value C again from the initial value updated by the CPU 56 to “4095”. Further, when counting up to “4095”, the counter 521 starts counting from “0” again. Then, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56 when it counts up to a value (final value) immediately before the updated initial value. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when all count values are input, as will be described later. In this case, when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the count value to “0”.

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 includes a count value permutation change register (RSC) 536, an update rule selection register (RRC) 542, and an update rule memory 543. The count value permutation change register 536 stores count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation (order of arrangement from the initial value to the final value), which is the update order of the count value C counted up by the counter 521. . When the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 displays the count value C permutation that the counter 521 counts up and updates. The permutation is changed to a different permutation from when “01h” is not stored.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the update rule selection register 542. As shown in FIG. The update rule selection register 542 is a register that sets an update rule used for rearranging the order of count values output from the counter 521 (changing the permutation). In this embodiment, an update rule used for changing the permutation of count values output from the counter 521 is set by setting a register value in the update rule selection register 542. As shown in FIG. 10, the update rule selection register 542 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 3 can be written and read. In addition, the update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 4 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 4 to 7 of the update rule selection register 542, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 4 to 7 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  The value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 is changed from “0 (= 00h)” to “15” in response to the count value permutation change data “01h” being written in the count value permutation change register 536. (= 0Fh) ”is updated cyclically. That is, each time the count value permutation data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is incremented by “1” from “0”. Return to "0".

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the update rule memory 543. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the update rule memory 543 stores the value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 and the count value update rule in association with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 11, for example, when the register value 1 is set in the update rule selection register 542, it can be seen that the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 is changed using the update rule B. In FIG. 11, the update rule A is the same update rule as that by which the counter 521 updates the count value C, and is stored in the update rule memory 543 in association with the register value “0”. Also, in the update rule memory 543, update rules B to P different from the update rule in which the counter 521 updates the count value C are stored in association with the register values “1” to “15”.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 first counts from the counter 521 until the final count value “4095” is first input. The count value is output as it is according to the currently set update rule. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value update rule when the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 inputs the final value after the change (the value immediately before the initial value) from the counter 521, and updates the count value. Will be changed.

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 selects an update rule corresponding to the register value of the update rule selection register 542 from the update rule memory 543, and sets it as an update rule used for changing the count value permutation. The count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the permutation from the initial value of the count value to the final value according to the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value again in order from the initial value “0”. To do. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts counting in accordance with the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value in order from the changed initial value. The permutation from the initial value to the final value will be changed. Then, the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs a count value according to the changed permutation.

  In this embodiment, when the maximum random number to be generated is limited by setting the maximum random number in a random number maximum value setting register 535 described later, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 counts The value C is limited to the maximum random number or less, and the permutation is changed and output. For example, it is assumed that the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the update rule A to the update rule B to change the count value permutation. Shall. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation to “256 → 255” according to the update rule B based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522. → → → 0 "and output.

  As described above, when the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the update rule to use the permutation of the count value C. Change and output. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example in which the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of count values output from the counter 521. As shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” into the count value permutation change register 536 at a predetermined timing. Then, 1 is added to the register value of the update rule selection register 542. For example, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is updated from “0” to “1”. When the register value is updated, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates the “update rule A” corresponding to the register value “0” before the update until the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521 for the first time. The count value is updated according to "." At this time, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values in a permutation of “0 → 1 →... → 4095” according to the update rule A.

  When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects “update rule B” corresponding to the updated register value “1” from the update rule memory 543. To set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input the count values after the initial value “0” from the counter 521 again, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of the count values according to the selected “update rule B” and outputs it. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “0 → 1 →... → 4095” to “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” and outputs the count value.

  Thereafter, the count value permutation change register 536 is reset in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting the count value updating operation in accordance with the updated update rule, as will be described later. Then, until the next count value permutation change data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 counts the permutation as “4095 → 4094 →. Continue to output values.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written again to the count value permutation change register 536 by the CPU 56, the register value of the count value permutation change register 536 is updated from “1” to “2”. When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects and sets “update rule C” corresponding to the register value “2” from the update rule memory 543. . When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input the count value after the initial value “0” again from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates and outputs the count value permutation in accordance with the “update rule C” selected and set. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” to “1 → 3 →... → 4095 → 0 →. Output the count value.

  As described above, the count value permutation register 536 is reset, and then the count value permutation data “01h” is written again into the count value permutation change register 536, whereby the permutation of the count values can be further changed.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the count value permutation change register 536. The count value permutation change register 536 is a register that sets count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation of count values counted up by the counter 521. As shown in FIG. 13, the count value permutation change register 536 is a readable 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that only bit 0 can be written and read. That is, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 1 to 7 of the count value permutation change register 536, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 1 to 7 are “0 (= 0000000b)”.

  Note that the value of the count value permutation change register 536 is reset by the CPU 56 in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting a count value update operation in accordance with the updated update rule. In this case, the CPU 56 returns the value written in the count value permutation change register 536 from the count value permutation change data “01h” to the initial value “0 (= 00h)”.

  The comparator 522 includes a random number maximum value setting register (RMX) 535 that stores random number maximum value setting data for designating the maximum value of random R (random number maximum value). The comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value updated by the counter 521 according to the random number maximum value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 has a random number maximum value (for example, “00FFh”) indicated by the count value input from the counter 521 and the random number maximum value setting data (for example, “00FFh”) stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. 256 "). When the comparator 522 determines that the input count value is equal to or less than the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531.

  In this embodiment, the comparator 522 specifically performs the following control. The comparator 522 obtains the initial value of the count value from the CPU 56 when updating the initial value of the count value, and obtains the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number. For example, when the initial value of the count value is “157” and the maximum random number value is “256”, the comparator 522 calculates the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number value as “100”. Further, the comparator 522 counts up how many count values are input from the initial value as the count values are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the number of input count values from the initial value reaches “100”, the comparator 522 determines that all count values from the initial value “157” to the maximum value “256” have been input. Then, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input to the counter 521. By determining based on the number of count values, even when the count value permutation circuit 523 has changed the count value permutation, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the maximum random number or less. When all count values are input, a notification signal can be output to the counter 521.

  An operation in which the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value will be described. In this example, a case where the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects the update rule A and the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 will be described.

  While the counter 521 is updating the count value from “0” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In accordance with rule A, the count values from “0” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 receives the value of the random number maximum value “256” from the comparator 522, determines whether the count value input from the counter 521 is larger than the random number maximum value, and the update rule is changed. Even when it is set (for example, update rule B), the count values from “257” to “4095” are compared based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The data is not output to the device 522. For example, when the initial value is set to “0” and the count value is updated to the final value “256”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value of the counter 521. In this example, it is assumed that the initial value is changed to “50” by the CPU 56.

  Based on the update rule A, while the count value is input from “0” to “255” from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 inputs the count value below the maximum random number “256”. Therefore, the input count value is output to the random value storage circuit 531 as it is. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches “256”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives an initial value (“0” in this example) of the count value from the CPU 56 when changing the initial value of the count value, and the random number maximum value (the main value) from the initial value “0”. In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “257”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 257, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to counter 521. In this example, since the CPU 56 changes the initial value to “50”, the counter 521 does not reset the count value even when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, and the changed initial value “50”. The count value is updated.

  While the counter 521 updates the count value from the changed initial value “50” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 sets the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. Based on the update rule A, the count values from “50” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. Further, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 does not output the count values from “257” to “4095” to the comparator 522 based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. When the count value to be updated by the counter 521 makes one round (when updated 257 times), when the count value permutation change data is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 Change the permutation of count values and output. For example, when the update rule is changed to the update rule B, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation from “256 → 255 →... 50” and outputs the result.

  While the count values from “256” to “50” are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value as it is to the random value storage circuit 531. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation change circuit 523 reaches “50”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives the initial count value (“50” in this example) from the CPU 56 when the initial count value is changed, and the random number maximum value (this In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “207”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 207, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to counter 521.

  Even when the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when the number of count values reaches 207. By doing so, even if the permutation of the count values is changed, the notification signal is counted based on the input of all the count values from the initial value “50” to the maximum value “256”. 521 can be output.

  When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the initial value of the count value and returns it to “0”. Then, the counter 521 updates the count value from “0”. When the value of the counter 521 is updated again from “0”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values from “49” to “0” to the comparator 522 based on the count value from the counter 521. The comparator 522 outputs the count value to the random value storage circuit 531 based on the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value (“49” in this example), the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the initial value of the count value of the counter 521 is changed again by the CPU 56.

  By repeating the operation as described above, the comparator 522 causes the counter 521 to continuously count up the count value from “0” to the maximum random number “256”, and the value from “0” to “256”. Is stored in the random value storage circuit 531 as a random R (random number value). In other words, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the random number maximum value “256” or less, and causes the counter 521 to update the count value.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535. FIG. 14A shows an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535 installed in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. FIG. 14B shows an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535 installed in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. First, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “4095 (= 0FFFh)”. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured so that bits 0 to 11 can be written and read. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured such that bits 12 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, even if control is performed to write values to bits 12 to 15 of the random number maximum value setting register 535, the values read from bits 12 to 15 are all “0 (= 0000b)”. Is.

  The random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 has a predetermined lower limit value. In this embodiment, when random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the random number maximum value setting register. The random number maximum value setting data “0FFFh” for specifying the initial value “4095” is set again in 535. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “256” to “4095”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502.

  Next, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b will be described. As shown in FIG. 14B, in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “65535 (= FFFFh)”. Further, in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured in a state in which all of the bits 0 to 15 can be written and read.

  When random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” for designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the initial value in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in the initial value. The random number maximum value setting data “FFFFh” specifying the value “65535” is reset. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “256” to “65535”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “65535”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 includes a cycle setting register (RPS) 537 for storing cycle setting data for designating the cycle of the clock signal output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532 (that is, the count value update cycle). The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 based on the cycle setting data stored in the cycle setting register 537, and generates a random number circuit. A clock signal (random number generating clock signal SI1) used to generate a random number value is generated inside 503. By doing so, the clock signal output circuit 524 operates to output the random number generation clock signal SI1 for updating the count value C to the counter 521 on condition that the clock signal has been input a predetermined number of times. . The period setting data is data for setting how many times the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 is to be divided. The clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the generated random number generation clock signal SI 1 to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532. For example, when the cycle setting data “0Fh (= 16)” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 by 16, and generates random numbers. A clock signal SI1 is generated. In this case, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is “cycle of system clock signal × 128 × 16”.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the period setting register 537. As shown in FIG. 15, the period setting register 537 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “256 (= FFh)”. The cycle setting register 537 is configured in a state where both writing and reading are possible.

  In addition, a predetermined lower limit value is determined for the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537. In this embodiment, when the cycle setting data “00h to 06h” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the CPU 56 In 537, the cycle setting data “07h” for specifying the lower limit value “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” is reset. That is, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”, and the CPU 56 is set to a value smaller than the lower limit value. If it is determined that it is, the cycle setting data is reset. The CPU 56 controls the period setting register 537 in which the period setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502.

  Note that the clock signal output circuit 524 may output the reference clock signal CLK to the counter 521 and the inverting circuit 532 without setting the period setting data in the period setting register 537. In this case, the CPU 56 does not need to perform processing for setting the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537 by comparing it with the lower limit value. Further, the counter 521 updates the count value C every time the reference clock signal CLK is input from the clock signal output circuit 524.

  The count value update signal output circuit 525 includes a count value update register (RGN) 538 that stores count value update data “01h”. The count value update data is data for requesting update of the count value. The count value update signal output circuit 525 outputs the count value update signal SI3 to the selector 528 in response to the count value update data “01h” being written in the count value update register 538.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the count value update register 538. As shown in FIG. 16, the count value update register 538 is an unreadable 8-bit register and is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the count value update register 538, it is invalidated.

  The random value read signal output circuit 526 includes a random value take-in register (RLT) 539 for storing random value take-in data “01h”. The random value acquisition data is data for requesting acquisition of the count value to the random value storage circuit 531. The random value read signal output circuit 526 generates a latch value read signal for requesting reading of the random value in response to the random value take-in data “01h” being written in the random value take-in register 539. Output to the circuit 533.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the random number fetch register 539. As shown in FIG. 17, the random value fetch register 539 is an unreadable 8-bit register. The random value fetch register 539 is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. That is, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the random value fetch register 539, it is invalidated.

  The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 includes a random number update method selection register (RTS) 540 that stores random number update method selection data. The random number update method selection data is data for designating one of the random number update methods, which is a method for updating the value of the random R. The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 responds to the random number update method selection data written in the random number update method selection register 540, and corresponds to the random number update method specified by the written random number update method selection data. The update method selection signal is output to the selector 528 and the latch signal generation circuit 533.

  FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number update method selection register 540. As shown in FIG. 18A, the random number update method selection register 540 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “00h”. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 1 can be written and read. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 2 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 2 to 7 of the random number update method selection register 540, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 2 to 7 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram of an example of random number update method selection data written to the random number update method selection register 540. As shown in FIG. 18B, the random number update method selection data is composed of 2-bit data. The random number update method selection data “01b” is used to specify the first random number update method. The random number update method selection data “10b” is used to specify the second random number update method. In this embodiment, the first random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the count value update signal SI3 from the count value update signal output circuit 525. The second random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, when the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” is written in the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 is ready to be activated. On the other hand, when the random number update method selection data “00b” or “11b” is written to the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 cannot be activated.

  The selector 528 selects either the count value update signal SI 3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525 or the random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs the selected signal to the counter 521. When a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a first random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the first random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a count value update signal. The count value update signal SI3 output from the circuit 525 is selected and output to the counter 521. On the other hand, when a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a second random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the second random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a clock signal. The random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the circuit 524 is selected and output to the counter 521. When the first update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 receives a clock signal according to the count value update signal SI3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525. A numerical value update instruction signal for instructing update of numerical data synchronized with the random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the output circuit 524 may be output to the counter 521.

  The random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 includes a random number circuit activation register (RST) 541 that stores random number circuit activation data “80h”. The random circuit activation data is data for requesting activation of the random number circuit 503. When random number circuit activation data “80h” is written in the random number circuit activation register 541, the random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 outputs a predetermined random number circuit activation signal to the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524, and the counter 521 and the clock The signal output circuit 524 is turned on. The random number circuit 503 is activated by starting the count value updating operation by the counter 521 and the internal clock signal output operation by the clock signal output circuit 524.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the random number circuit activation register 541. As shown in FIG. 19, the random number circuit activation register 541 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “00h”. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured such that only bit 7 can be written and read. In addition, the random number circuit activation register 541 is configured such that bits 0 to 6 cannot be written or read. That is, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 0 to 6 of the random number circuit activation register 541, the value is invalid, and all values read from bits 0 to 6 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  The random value storage circuit 531 is a 16-bit register, for example, and stores a random R value that is a random number used in the jackpot determination in the game control process. The random value storage circuit 531 stores the count value C output from the counter 521 via the comparator 522 as a random R value in response to the input of the latch signal SL from the latch signal generation circuit 533. Each time the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random value storage circuit 531 reads the count value C updated by the counter 521 and stores the random R value.

  FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration example of the random value storage circuit 531. As shown in FIG. 20, the random value storage circuit 531 includes two AND circuits 201 and 203, two NOT circuits 202 and 204, 16 flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and 16 OR circuits. 2201-2216.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is connected to the output terminal of the latch signal generation circuit 533 and the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the flip-flop circuit 2101. Are connected to clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203.

  The input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 204. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 204 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 203, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 and one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  The input terminals D1 to D16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to the output terminal of the comparator 522. The clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminals Q1 to Q16 are connected to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  The input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204 and the output terminals of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and the output terminals are connected to the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560. .

  The operation of the random value storage circuit 531 will be described. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random value storage circuit 531 and the timing at which the random value storage circuit 531 outputs each signal. As shown in FIG. 21, when the output control signal SC (high level signal in this example) is not input from the CPU 56 mounted in the game control microcomputer 560 (that is, to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203). When the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (when the input is at the low level) (at the timings T1, T2, and T7 in the example shown in FIG. 21), the two input terminals of the AND circuit 201 are connected. Both inputs are high. Therefore, the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a high level. The signal SR output from the AND circuit 201 is input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116.

  The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are responsive to the rising edges of the signal SR input from the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16, and the bit data C1 to C1 of the count value C input from the comparator 522 via the input terminals D1 to D16. C16 is latched and stored as bit data R1 to R16 of the random value. The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 output random R bit data R1 to R16 to be stored from the output terminals Q1 to Q16.

  When the output control signal SC is not input (in the example shown in FIG. 21, the period up to the timing T3 and the period after the timing T6), the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the low level. The signal SG output from the output terminal of the circuit 203 is at a low level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted by the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of each of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The circuits 2201 to 2216 output high level signals. That is, the signals SO1 to SO16 output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level regardless of whether the values of the input random R bit data R1 to R16 are “0” or “1”. (“1”). By doing so, the value output from the random value storage circuit 531 is always “65535 (= 1111111111111111b)”, and the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, even if an attempt is made to read a random number from the random value storage circuit 531, only the same value “65535” can always be read from the random value storage circuit 531, and when the output control signal SC is not input, the random value storage circuit 531 is in an unreadable (disabled) state. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as the random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each jackpot determination shown in FIG. 30, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  When the latch control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 when the latch signal SL is not input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (in the example shown in FIG. 21, the period from the timing T4 to the timing T6), Since both inputs to the two input terminals are at a high level, the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at a high level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a low level signal. A low level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, when the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level, the output from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is high. A level signal is output. In addition, when a signal input to the other input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, a low level signal is output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216. That is, the values of the random R bit data R1 to R16 input to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are unchanged from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 (that is, the values of the bit data R1 to R16 are “ “1” is output when it is “1” and “0” when it is “0”). By doing so, random R can be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 is in a readable (enable) state.

  However, if the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 before the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at a low level. Even if the output control signal SC is input in the state where the signal SL is input (in the example shown in FIG. 21, in the period from the timing T3 to the timing T4), the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203. Remains low. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted by the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of each of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The signals SO1 to SO16 output from the circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level. Even though the output control signal SC is input, the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the latch signal SL is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the output control signal SC. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as the random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each jackpot determination shown in FIG. 30, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  Further, when the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 before the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a low level. Even if the latch signal SL is input while the control signal SC is being input (timing T5 in the example shown in FIG. 21), the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 remains at the low level. It becomes. Therefore, the signal SR input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 does not rise from the low level to the high level, and the random R bit data R1 to R16 stored in the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116. Is not updated despite the latch signal SL being input. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the latch signal SL.

  The inversion circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 in which the polarity of the clock signal is inverted by inverting the signal level in the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, the inverting circuit 532 outputs the generated inverted clock signal SI2 to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  The latch signal generation circuit 533 is configured using a selector, a flip-flop circuit, and the like. The latch signal generation circuit 533 receives the random number read signal from the random number read signal output circuit 526 and the inverted clock signal SI2 from the inversion circuit 532, and stores the random value in the random value storage circuit 531. Output SL. The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL in accordance with the random value update method designated by the random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. In this case, when the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 selects the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532, and the latch signal It outputs to the random value storage circuit 531 as SL. On the other hand, when the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526. In synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the circuit 532, the latch signal SL is output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  The timer circuit 534 inputs a winning detection signal SS indicating that a winning of a game ball to the normal winning ball device 12A is detected from the first start port switch 20a, and also receives a winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning ball device 12B. A winning detection signal SS indicating that it has been detected is input from the second start port switch 20b. The timer circuit 534 includes a time during which the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the first start port switch 20a, a time during which the winning detection signal is continuously input from the second start port switch 20b, Are measured separately. Then, when the measurement time corresponding to the winning detection signal SS from the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b reaches a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms), the timer circuit 534 outputs the random number read signal output circuit 526. Random value take-in data “01h” is written into the random value take-in register 539. For example, the timer circuit 534 is configured by an up counter or a down counter that is activated in response to the input of a high level signal. The timer circuit 534 has a clock circuit 501 while the inputs from the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b are at a high level (that is, while the winning detection signal SS is continuously input). The reference clock signal CLK sequentially input from 1 is counted up or down. Then, when the count value to be counted up or down reaches a value corresponding to 3 ms, the timer circuit 534 determines that the winning detection signal SS is input from the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b, Random value acquisition data “01h” is written to the random value acquisition register 539.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map of a storage area in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 22, the area from address 0000h to 1FFFh in the storage area of the game control microcomputer 560 is allocated to the ROM 54. An area from addresses 7E00h to 7FFFh is allocated to the RAM 55. Further, the area from the address FD00h to the address FE00h is allocated to a built-in register such as the random number maximum value setting register 535.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the area from address 0000h to address 1FFFh allocated to the ROM 54 includes a user program area and a user program management area. A program (user program) 550 created in advance by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) is stored in the user program area in the area of addresses 0000h to 1F7Fh. Further, data (user program execution data) necessary for the CPU 56 to execute the user program 550 is stored in the user program management area in the area of addresses 1F80h to 1FFFh. Of the areas 7E00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55, the areas 7E00h to 7EFFh are unused areas, and the areas 7EFFh to 7FFFh are used as work areas.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the user program management area. As shown in FIG. 23, in the area of address 1F97h, an initial value changing method selected by the user among the initial value changing methods which are methods for changing the initial value input to the counter 521 is designated. The initial value change method setting data is stored. In addition, in the areas 1F98h and 1F99h, RAM address data for specifying an address (designated RAM address) in the RAM 55 designated in advance by the user among addresses 7EFFh to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55 is stored. The In this case, of the values indicating the designated RAM address, the lower value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F98h address, and the higher value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F99h address.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of an example of initial value change method setting data. As shown in FIG. 24, the initial value change data is composed of 8-bit data. The initial value change data “00h” is data specifying that the initial value is not changed as the initial value change method. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “00h” is set, the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value from a predetermined initial value “0” to a predetermined final value. Become. Further, the initial value change data “01h” is data specifying that the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to a value based on an ID number for identifying the game control microcomputer 560 as an initial value change method. It is. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “01h” is set, the initial value of the counter value updated by the counter 521 is changed from “0” to a value based on the ID number. The count value is updated from the initial value to a predetermined final value.

  The user program 550 stored in the user program area will be described. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the user program 550. As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, the user program 550 includes a random number circuit setting program 551 composed of a plurality of types of program modules, a display result determination program 552, a count value permutation change program 554, And a numerical value update program 555.

  The random number circuit setting program 551 is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to execute a random number circuit setting process for performing an initial setting for updating the random R value. That is, the CPU 56 functions as random number circuit setting means by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program 551.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the random number circuit setting program 551. As shown in FIG. 26, the random number circuit setting program 551 includes a random number maximum value setting module 551a, a random number update method selection module 551b, a cycle setting module 551c, a random number circuit activation module 551d, as a plurality of types of program modules. An initial value changing module 551e and a random number circuit selecting module 551f are included.

  The random number maximum value setting module 551a is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the maximum value of the random R preset by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). The CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number maximum value setting module 551a, thereby writing random number maximum value setting data for specifying the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number maximum value setting register 535. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when “255” is set in advance as the maximum value of the random R by the user, the CPU 56 writes the random number maximum value setting data “00FFh” in the random number maximum value setting register 535 and the maximum value of the random R “255”. Is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number update method selection module 551b is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the random number update method (first random number update method or second random number update method) selected by the user. The CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” designating the random number update method selected by the user in the random number update method selection register 540 by executing the process according to the random number update method selection module 551b. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the random number update method selected by the user in the random number circuit 503. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting either the first random number update method or the second random number update method as the random number update method used by the random number circuit 503 for the random number update.

  The cycle setting module 551c is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user (that is, the cycle in which the clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the clock signal to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532). It is a module. The CPU 56 writes the period setting data for designating the period of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the period setting register 537 by executing the process according to the period setting module 551c. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when the cycle of the internal clock signal is set in advance as “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 16” by the user, the CPU 56 writes the cycle setting data “0Fh” in the cycle setting register 537 and sets the internal clock signal The period “system clock signal period × 128 × 16” is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number circuit activation module 551d is a program module for activating the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503 by writing the random number circuit activation data “80h” to the random number circuit activation register 541 by executing processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d.

  The initial value change module 551e is a program module for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521. The CPU 56 functions as an initial value changing unit by executing processing according to the initial value changing module 551e. The CPU 56 executes the initial value changing module 551e to change the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 by the initial value changing method selected by the user. By doing so, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting an initial value changing method.

  In this embodiment, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored in the area of address 1F97h in the user program management area, the CPU 56 sets the initial value of the count value for each game control microcomputer 560. The value is changed to a value calculated based on the assigned unique ID number.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculation value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the calculated value “150” obtained by adding the predetermined value “50” to the ID number “100” is set in advance as the ID number. Are stored in association with each other. Further, for example, the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100” is stored in advance in association with the ID number. Further, for example, only a predetermined value may be stored in advance in association with the ID number. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a value “150” obtained by adding an ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “50”) stored in advance as an initial value of the count value. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a value “50” obtained by subtracting a predetermined value (for example, “50”) stored in advance from the ID number (for example, “100”) as the initial count value. It may be a value.

  When the initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. By doing so, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved, and the initial value of the random number can be made difficult to recognize only by looking at the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. . Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the transition condition to the big hit state from being illegally established by an action such as generating a captured signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine, and improving security. Can be improved.

  For example, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, adds the predetermined value to the ID number). The initial value of the count value is changed to the calculated value obtained. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may calculate a value that is randomly changed using a random number as an ID number, thereby randomly updating a value used for the calculation and obtaining an initial value. By doing so, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number circuit selection module 551f is a program module for setting a random number circuit to be used when executing a timer interrupt process including a game control process from among the random number circuits 503 built in the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 executes a process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f, so that any of the two random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is selected. Set whether to use when executing timer interrupt processing. For example, the CPU 56 uses a 12-bit random number circuit 503a or 16-bit as a random number circuit used when executing the timer interrupt process according to a predetermined set value (a value set in advance by the user) stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55. The random number circuit 503b is set.

  Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer may perform a jackpot determination based on a random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and may perform a probability change determination based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. . In this embodiment, the random value storage circuit 531 is present in each of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b (that is, a random number storage circuit that stores a random number for 12 bits and a random number for 16 bits). And a random number storage circuit for storing the same). When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs the random number read from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the random number read from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. , And stored in separate buffer areas provided in the RAM 55. Therefore, even when the timing for reading a random number from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the timing for reading a random number from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same, two different random numbers can be extracted and stored in different buffer areas.

  The random value update program 555 is a program for updating the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 when the first random number update method is selected as the random number update method. The CPU 56 functions as a random value updating means by executing processing according to the random value updating program 555. When the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 executes the random number value update program 555 and writes the count value update data “01h” in the count value update register 538, whereby the count value is stored in the counter 521. And the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. When the second random number update method is selected as the random number update method, the counter 521 is updated with the random number generation clock signal output from the clock signal output circuit 524, and the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. The value of random R stored in is updated.

  The display result determination program 552 is a program for determining whether or not the display result in the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is a big hit symbol. The CPU 56 functions as a pre-determination unit by executing processing according to the display result determination program 552.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 receives a game ball winning the special winning ball device 12A or the normal variable winning ball device 12B and fulfills a condition (execution condition) for executing a special symbol variable display. Then, the process is executed according to the display result determination program 552. The CPU 56 updates the random number value storage circuit 531 after the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A and the condition for executing the variable display of the special symbol on the first variable display device 8A is established. The value of random R (random number for jackpot determination) is read, and it is determined whether or not the display result in the first variable display device 8A is a jackpot symbol. Further, the CPU 56 receives the game ball from the random variable value storage circuit 531 based on the fact that the game variable is won in the normal variable winning ball device 12B and the condition for executing the variable display of the special symbol is established in the second variable display device 8B. The random R value after the update is read to determine whether or not the display result on the second variable display device 8B is a big hit symbol.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the random R value or reads the random R value when the first random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 27, when the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the count value update data “01h” into the count value update register 538, thereby storing the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531. The value of R (for example, “2”) is updated. Then, for example, in response to a condition (execution condition) for the game ball winning the normal winning ball device 12 </ b> A and executing the variable symbol special display (execution condition), the CPU 56 performs random R from the random value storage circuit 531. Is read (for example, “2”).

  When the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is further updated, an interval equal to or longer than the cycle of the system clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 has elapsed since the random R value was updated during the previous update. Sometimes, the count value update data “01h” must be written to the count value update register 538. This is because it is necessary to secure time for reading the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the random R value or reads the random R value when the second random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 28, when the second random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the random value take-in command “01h” into the random value take-in register 539 so that the count value output by the counter 521 is output. (For example, “2”) is taken into the random value storage circuit 531 to update the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value (for example, “2”) from the random value storage circuit 531.

  Specifically, when the second random number update method is selected, the counter 521 updates the count value C using the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 as a trigger. Thereafter, when the random value acquisition command “01h” is written in the random value acquisition register 539, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL to the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the random value storage circuit 531 reads and stores the count value output from the counter 521 with the input of the latch signal SL as a trigger. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531.

  If the CPU 56 does not write the random value acquisition command “01h” to the random value acquisition register 539, even if the counter 521 updates the count value, the random value storage circuit 531 stores the random value that the counter 521 updates. Do not read. For example, the CPU 56 writes the random value acquisition command “01h” into the random value acquisition register 539, causes the count value “3” output from the counter 521 to be acquired into the random value storage circuit 531, and the random value storage circuit 531 stores it. Assume that the random R value “3” is updated. In this case, if the CPU 56 does not write the random number value capture command “01h” again in the random number capture register 539, the count value output from the counter 521 is updated from “3” to “4” or “5”. The random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is not updated, and the random value read from the random value storage circuit 531 remains “3”.

  The count value permutation change program 554 writes count value permutation change data “01h” to the count value permutation change register 536, and executes count value permutation change processing for changing the permutation of count values stored in the random value storage circuit 531. It is a program for. The CPU 56 functions as numerical data permutation changing means by executing processing according to the count value permutation changing program 554. The CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change program 554 and writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536, whereby the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs and inputs to the random value storage circuit 531. The permutation of the count values to be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special figure holding memory 570, a big hit determination table memory 571, a flag memory 572, and first and second start port switch timer memories 573A and 573B. And first and second variable display time timers 122A and 122B, and a variable display number counter 123.

  The special figure holding memory 570 receives a special ball game by one of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B when a game ball wins one of the normal winning ball device 12A and the normal variable winning ball device 12B. Stores hold information related to a special figure game in which a start condition for starting variable display is not established due to reasons such as the fact that the start condition for starting is established but the previous special figure game is being executed, etc. It is a memory for. For example, the special figure holding memory 570 is used for determining the big hit that is extracted from the random value storage circuit 531 or the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the start condition by winning the game ball to the normal winning ball device 12A or the normal variable winning ball device 12B. Numeric data indicating the value of the random number is stored in association with the hold number until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “8”) according to the order in which the numerical data is extracted. Also, the special figure holding memory 570 includes start winning opening data “first” indicating that a game ball has won the normal winning ball apparatus 12A serving as the first starting winning opening, and a normal variable winning serving as the second starting winning opening. One of the start winning opening data “second” indicating that the game ball has won the ball device 12B is stored in association with the hold number together with numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number. Here, the special figure holding memory 570 includes a counter for counting the number of stored memories (first stored memory number) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal winning ball device 12A serving as the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning prize. There may be provided a counter for counting the number of stored memories (second reserved memory number) based on the winning of game balls to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B serving as the mouth.

  The big hit determination table memory 571 stores a plurality of big hit determination tables used by the CPU 56 to determine whether or not the display results of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B are used as the big hit symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30A, the big hit determination table memory 571 stores a normal time big hit determination table 571a used in a gaming state (normal gaming state or time shortening state) other than the probability variation state. To do. Further, the jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a probability change jackpot determination table 571b used in the probability variation state, as shown in FIG. When the big hit determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIG. 30, the probability of determining a big hit depends greatly on the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, for example, if the set random number maximum value is too small, the difference in the probability of determining a big hit between the case where the normal big hit determination table 571a is used and the case where the probability variation big hit determination table 571b is used is small. As a result, the player's interest in the game is diminished. Therefore, a plurality of determination tables (a plurality of normal time big hit determination tables 571a and a plurality of probability variation big hit determination tables 571b) may be stored in the big hit determination table memory 571 in association with the random number circuit 503 and the maximum random number. . Then, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the random number circuit 503 to be used and the determination tables 571a and 571b corresponding to the maximum random number among the determination tables stored in the jackpot determination table memory 571 to display the display result determination program 552. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the display result of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is a big hit symbol. By doing so, even if the type of random number circuit 503 to be used and the maximum random number value are different, it is possible to control so that the probability of determining a big hit is somewhat the same.

  In the flag memory 572, various flags used in the game control process for controlling the progress of the game are set. For example, the flag memory 572 is set with a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability variation state and a jackpot flag indicating that the game state is a big hit state.

  The first and second start port switch timer memories 573A and 573B are added or cleared in accordance with the winning detection signal SS input from the corresponding start port switch of the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b, respectively. Stored timer value.

  Each of the first and second variable display time timers 122A and 122B has a special symbol variable display time which is the execution time of the special figure game by the corresponding one of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. It is for measuring on the main side. For example, the first and second variable display time timers 122A and 122B each store a timer value corresponding to the remaining variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game, and are used as a down counter that periodically counts down the timer value. . In this case, in the first variable display time timer 122A, when the variable display of the special symbol by the first variable display device 8A is started, the special symbol in the variable display pattern determined using the variable display pattern determining random number or the like. The timer initial value corresponding to the variable display time is set. On the other hand, in the second variable display time timer 122B, when the variable display of the special symbol by the second variable display device 8B is started, the special symbol in the variable display pattern determined using the random number for determining the variable display pattern is used. A timer initial value corresponding to the variable display time is set. The first and second variable display time timers 122A and 122B may be configured by a timer circuit or a counter circuit provided separately from the game control microcomputer 560.

  The variable display number counter 123 is for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in a special game state such as a probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed or a time reduction state in which time reduction control is performed. In the variable display number counter 123, a special figure game predetermined to be executed in the probability variation state when the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game has become a probable big hit symbol is completed. Data indicating the number of times (for example, “100”) is set as an initial value. Each time a special game in which the variable display result is lost in the probability variation state is executed, the count value of the variable display number counter 123 is decremented by one.

  In addition, the game state is transmitted from the gate switch 21, the first count switch 22a, and the second count switch 22b to the gaming control microcomputer (RAM 55) 560 via the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the switch relay board 95. Game control flag setting area for setting a plurality of types of flags to be set or cleared in accordance with signals, signals rolled from the first start port switch 20a and the second start port switch 20b, etc., and pachinko games A game control timer setting area for storing data indicating a plurality of types of timer values used for game control in the machine 1 may be provided. For example, in the game control flag setting area of the game control microcomputer (RAM 55) 560, each flag is set to an on state or cleared to an off state corresponding to each of a plurality of types of flags. A plurality of types of flags can be set by storing flag status data indicating the status of each flag. The circuit used for flag setting and timer may be constituted by a register circuit provided separately from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control flag setting area, for example, a special symbol process flag (first and second special symbol process flag) and a big hit flag (first flag) corresponding to each of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. 1 and a second big hit flag), a probability change confirmation flag (first and second probability change confirmation flag), and the like. In addition, in the game control flag setting area, there are provided a probability changing flag, a short time flag, a variable display progress stop flag, and the like.

  The first and second special symbol process flags select and execute which processing in the first and second special symbol process processing executed corresponding to each of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. Tell what to do. The first and second big hit flags are used to determine that the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol when the special figure game is started by each of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. Is set to the on state. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state ends, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off. The first and second certainty change confirmation flags indicate that the variable display result in the special figure game is to be a big hit when the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is started. When the determination is made, it is set to the on state. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability variation confirmation flag is cleared and turned off.

  The probability change flag is set to the big hit game state by winning a big hit in the special game by the first variable display device 8A, and then the first probability change confirmation flag is turned on when the big hit game state ends. Corresponding to being, it is set to the on state. In addition, the probability change flag is turned on when the big hit gaming state ends after the big hit gaming state is ended after the big hit gaming state is controlled by the big win in the special game by the second variable display device 8B. Corresponding to being turned on, it is set to the on state. On the other hand, the probability changing flag is cleared when it is determined that the probability variation state is to be ended when the special game is started, or when the count value in the variable display counter 123 becomes “0”. Off. The short time flag is set to the on state in response to the determination that the probability variation state is to be ended when the special figure game is started in the probability variation state in which the probability variation flag is on. Further, the hour / middle flag is cleared and turned off when the count value of the variable display number counter 123 becomes “0”.

  Here, the status data indicating whether the probability changing flag is on or off, and the status data indicating whether the hourly / shortest flag is on or off are, for example, in each of the probability changing flag and the hourly / shortest flag. Correspondingly, the data may be one bit at a time stored in the game control flag setting area. Specifically, when the value of the probability variation state data stored in the game control flag setting area corresponding to the probability changing flag is “0”, the probability changing flag is off. Assume that the middle flag is on. In addition, when the value of the time reduction state data stored in the game control flag setting area corresponding to the time reduction flag is “0”, the time reduction flag is OFF, and when it is “1”, the time reduction flag is set. Assume that it is off. In this case, the time reduction flag may be set (turned on) when the probability changing flag is set (turned on). That is, the present invention is not limited to the above example as long as data is set so that three states of a probability variation state, a time shortening state, and a normal gaming state can be specified.

  Alternatively, common status data may be prepared for the probability changing flag and the hour / short flag, and either one of the probability changing flag and the hour / middle flag may be turned on and the other may be turned off. Specifically, 2-bit special game state data that is common to the probability changing flag and the hour / short / high flag is prepared, and when the value of the special game state data is “01”, the hour / short / high flag is on. It is assumed that the probability changing flag is off, and when it is “10”, the time reduction flag is off while the probability changing flag is on. When it is “00”, it is assumed that the game state is normal.

  The variable display progress stop flag indicates that the special symbol is variablely displayed in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B when the variable display result in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A becomes a big hit symbol. Or when the special symbol variable display is performed in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A when the variable display result in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B becomes a big hit symbol. , Set to the on state. On the other hand, when the variable display progress stop flag is on when the big hit gaming state ends, the variable display progress stop flag is cleared and turned off.

  Here, the special game played by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B will be described. In the special game, when a predetermined time elapses after the variable symbol special display is started, the fixed symbol that is the variable symbol variable display result is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A, the specific gaming state (big hit) by opening and closing the first special variable winning ball device 13A Gaming state). In this embodiment, a special symbol indicating “3” or “7” is a jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A, the opening / closing plate of the first special variable winning ball device 13A is set for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number. The game ball is opened in a period until (for example, 10) winning balls are generated, and the game ball that falls on the surface of the game board 6 is received while being opened, and then closed. The opening / closing cycle can be repeated up to a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, 16 times).

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B, the big special gaming state is brought about by opening and closing the second special variable winning ball device 13B. In the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the big win symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B, the opening / closing plate of the second special variable winning ball device 13B has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number. The game ball is opened in a period until (for example, 10) winning balls are generated, and the game ball that falls on the surface of the game board 6 is received while being opened, and then closed. The opening / closing cycle can be repeated up to a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, 16 times). Alternatively, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special game by the second variable display device 8B, a predetermined period (for example, 45 seconds) is different from when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special game by the first variable display device 8A. ) Or the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B is opened in a period until a predetermined number (for example, 15) of winning balls are generated, and then the opening / closing cycle to be closed is repeated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 20 times). You may be able to do that.

  As described above, in the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B, the special game is started based on the fact that different starting conditions are satisfied. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed as the final symbol in the first variable display device 8A, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the final symbol in the second variable display device 8B, the first special variable winning ball device 13A and It is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the opening / closing operation in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol indicating “3” is the normal jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating “7” is the probability variation jackpot symbol. When a special display result (probability variation jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in a special figure game, a probability variation jackpot is reached. When a promising big hit is made, after the big hit gaming state based on the probable big hit is over, it continues as one of the special gaming states until a special game is executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It becomes a probability variation state in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed. In this probability variation state, the probability that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is improved as compared to the normal gaming state. Furthermore, in the probability variation state, the variable display time in the special game is controlled so as to be shorter than the normal game state. Note that the normal gaming state is a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state or the special gaming state, and the probability that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special figure game is the initial value immediately after the power is turned on. It is controlled in the same way as the setting state.

  Here, in this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation big hit is finished, even before the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, when the special figure game is started, a predetermined ratio is set. In some cases, the probability variation state ends. In this case, the time is continuously reduced as one of the special game states different from the probability fluctuation state until the number of executions of the special figure game after the big hit game state based on the probability change big hit reaches the predetermined number of times. This is a time reduction state in which control (short-time control) is performed. In the time shortening state where time-short control is performed, the probability of being a big hit in each special figure game and being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the same as in the normal gaming state, but the special symbol variable display time in the special figure game is normal. It is controlled to be shorter than the gaming state.

  On the other hand, when a non-special display result (ordinary big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game, it is usually a big hit. When the normal big hit is made, the probability variation control is not performed after the big hit gaming state is ended, so the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol and is controlled to the big hit gaming state is not improved.

  In the probability variation state and the time reduction state, the variable display time in the normal symbol variable display (ordinary game) on the normal symbol display 10 is shorter than that in the normal game state, and is displayed in each normal game. The probability that the result is a winning symbol is improved. At this time, the tilting time of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B may be longer than that in the normal gaming state, and the number of tilts may be increased as compared with that in the normal gaming state. As described above, in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, the gaming state is advantageous to the player, which is different from the big hit gaming state. Here, in the time shortened state, the probability variation control is not performed, and the probability of being in the big hit gaming state is the same as in the normal gaming state, so the probability varying state is more advantageous for the player than the time shortening state.

  Further, for example, the first variable display device 8A variably displays 10 kinds of symbols indicating numbers "0" to "9" as special symbols, while the second variable display device 8B displays alphabets "A" to "J". The 10 types of symbols that indicate may be variably displayed as special symbols. Alternatively, each of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B may variably display a plurality of types of character symbols related to different motifs as special symbols.

  Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIGS. 31 and 32 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of output port assignment in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 31, the output port 0 is an output port for prize ball control signals (CD0 to CD4) transmitted to the payout control board 100. Further, 8-bit data (CD0 to CD7) of the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 80 is output from the output port 1. Note that the logic (for example, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is on) shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 may be used. When the signal line between the control board 100 and the payout control board 100 is disconnected or when the cable is disconnected (including no cable connection), the payout control microcomputer 660 always detects “OFF”. Is defined. Specifically, generally, when a disconnection or disconnection of a cable occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side. “Logic” is determined so that the output port of the microcomputer 560 is turned off. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit for logically inverting the signal is provided outside the output port on the main board 31.

  In addition, a solenoid (first solenoid valve solenoid) 24a for opening and closing the first special variable winning ball apparatus 13A for opening and closing the grand prize opening from the output port 2, and a second special variable winning ball for opening and closing the big prize opening. Drive signals are output to a solenoid (second large prize opening solenoid) 24b for opening and closing the device 13B and a solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid) 23 for opening and closing the normal variable winning ball device 12B. Further, an effect control INT signal (capture signal) for the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 80 is also output. The effect control INT signal is a signal for instructing the effect control means to capture (receive) 8-bit data of the effect control command.

  Further, a control signal for the start memory LED 9 is output from the output port 3. Then, a control signal for the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal for the normal symbol start memory LED 11, and a drive signal for the status indicator lamp 25 are output from the output port 4. Then, various information output signals from the output ports 5 and 6 to the panel external terminal board 104, that is, output data of information related to control are output. Further, a drive signal for the first variable display device 8A is output from the output port 7, and a drive signal for the second variable display device 8B is output from the output port 8.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 33, the first count switch 22a, the second count switch 22b, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 20a, and the second start port switch are provided in bits 0 to 4 of the input port 0, respectively. The detection signal 20b is input. In addition, the power-off signal from the power supply board 910, the detection signal of the clear switch 921 from the power supply board 910, and the reset signal from the power supply board 910 are input to the bits 0, 1, and 2 of the input port 1, respectively. In addition, the power-off signal from the power supply board 910, the detection signal of the clear switch 921 from the power supply board 910, and the reset signal from the power supply board 910 are input to the bits 0, 1, and 2 of the input port 1, respectively.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 show main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart. When the input level of the reset signal from the power supply board 910 becomes a high level (off state), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. Thereafter, the main processing after step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode of the maskable interrupt is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt is generated, the game control microcomputer 560 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is initialized (setting of input / output assignment of the built-in device) and the built-in devices CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized (step S4). . The initialization of PIO is, for example, setting an off state value to all bits of the output port. The initialization of the CTC is a timer mode setting or the like.

  In the game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment, the following three modes are prepared as maskable interrupt modes. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Interrupt mode 0: The built-in device that made the interrupt request sends an RST instruction (1 byte) or a CALL instruction (3 bytes) onto the internal data bus of the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the instruction at the address corresponding to the RST instruction or the address specified by the CALL instruction. At reset, the game control microcomputer 560 automatically enters the interrupt mode 0. Therefore, when setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2, it is necessary to perform a process for setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2 in the initial setting process.

  Interrupt mode 1: When an interrupt is accepted, the mode always jumps to address 0038 (h).

  Interrupt mode 2: The address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the microcomputer 560 for game control and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is It is a mode that indicates a cover address. That is, the interrupt address is an address indicated by 2 bytes in which the upper address is the value of the specific register and the lower address is the interrupt vector. Therefore, an interrupt process can be set at an arbitrary address (although it is skipped). Each built-in device has a function of transmitting an interrupt vector when making an interrupt request.

  Therefore, when the interrupt mode 2 is set, it becomes possible to easily process an interrupt request from each built-in device, and it is possible to install an interrupt process at an arbitrary position in the program. . Furthermore, unlike interrupt mode 1, it is also easy to prepare each interrupt process for each interrupt generation factor. As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is set to the interrupt mode 2 in step S2 of the initial setting process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the game device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software. Specifically, first, the initialization wait number specification value 1 is set in the wait counter 1 (step S81). Also, the initialization wait number specification value 2 is set in the wait counter 2 (step S82). Note that general-purpose registers (HL register and BC register) built in the game control microcomputer 560 are used as the wait counters 1 and 2. Then, the value of the wait counter 2 is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter 2 becomes 0 (steps S83 and S84). When the value of the weight counter 2 becomes 0, the value of the weight counter 1 is decremented by 1 (step S85). When the value of the weight counter 1 is not 0 (step S86), the process returns to step S82.

  If the value of the wait counter 1 is 0 in step S86 (step S86; YES), it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an off state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S87). When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as a + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S87 (high level). The game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable. If the power-off signal is off, the process proceeds to step S5.

  By the software delay processing as described above, the software delay processing is executed approximately [(initialization wait number specification value 1) × (initialization wait number specification value 2) × (processing time of step S83, step S84)]]. Compared with the case where it does not, the start timing of a game control process can be delayed. In other words, the initialization weight count designation values 1 and 2 are determined so that the start timing of the game control process can be delayed by a desired time. Note that the values of the initialization wait times designation values 1 and 2 are set in the ROM 54. The software delay processing described here is an example, and the software delay processing may be realized by other methods.

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also includes an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) as a built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit). Two external clock / timer trigger inputs CLK / TRG 2 and 3 and two timer outputs ZC / TO 0 and 1 are provided.

  If the power-off signal is off in step S87 (step S87; YES), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a payout start command transmission process for transmitting a payout start command (payout start command) to the payout control board 100. After that (step S5), the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 input via the input port 1 only once (step S7). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15). When the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is in an on state (when pressed), a low level clear switch signal is output. Note that in the input port 1, the clear switch signal is in the high level. Further, for example, the game store clerk can easily execute the initialization process by starting the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the clear switch 921 (for example, turning on the power switch 914). That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is not in the on state, data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is confirmed whether or not (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply stops, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. If it is confirmed that such protection processing has been performed, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that there is a backup. When it is confirmed that such a protection process is not performed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the protection process has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process described later according to the execution of the data protection process in the backup RAM area (for example, It is confirmed by whether or not 2). Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, a flag indicating that the data protection process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that there is a backup, it may be determined that there is a backup.

  If it is determined that there is a backup, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on that is not the time when the power supply is stopped (the process of steps S10 to S15) Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 returns a game for returning the internal state of the game control microcomputer 560 and the control state of the electric component control means such as the display control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. State recovery processing is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and indicates that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. The recovery command shown is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Depending on the control state such as a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. Thus, an initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes random number circuit setting processing for initially setting the random number circuits 503a and 503b (step S14). In this case, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program 551 to make the random number circuits 503a and 503b update the random R value. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). . That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17). The game control microcomputer 560 disables the interrupt when the display random number update process is executed (step S16), and sets the interrupt enable state when the display random number update process ends (step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a symbol displayed on the first variable display device 8A, the second variable display device 8B, and the normal symbol display 10, and the display random number update process is a display random number. This is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for use.

  Note that when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed because the display random number update process is also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid this. That is, if the timer interrupt is generated during the process of step S17 and the counter value for generating the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt process, the continuity of the count value is impaired. There is a case. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the process of step S17.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like can easily perform initial initialization by starting the power supply to the gaming machine (for example, turning on the power switch 914) while the clear switch 921 is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the operation of the microcomputer when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and when the power supply is stopped will be described below. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply exceeds a predetermined value, the power-off signal is turned off. Further, when the value of VCC exceeds a predetermined value, the reset signal becomes high level. As described above, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to high level after turning off the power-off signal. The reset signal is input to the main board 31, the payout control board 100, and the voice frame lamp board 70. The reset signal is input to the effect control board 80 via the audio frame lamp board 70. Then, it is input to the CPU 112 mounted on the main board 31, the payout control CPU 659 mounted on the payout control board 100, and the effect control CPU 118 a mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the reset signal input to the main board 31 is input to the game control microcomputer 560 (when the input level becomes high), the game control microcomputer 560 is operable (the microcomputer is reset and the program is executed). However, when it becomes operable, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a security check process for confirming whether the contents of the ROM are valid based on the security check program. Execute. When the security check process ends, a software delay process is executed. Thereafter, a payout activation command transmission process is executed, and after a check process of the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is performed, the game control process is started. If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 indicates an on state, RAM clear processing or the like is performed.

  The payout control CPU 659 becomes operable when the reset signal becomes high level. When in an operable state, first, a part of the initial setting process is executed. Thereafter, it waits for a payout start command to be transmitted from the main board 31, and when it receives a payout start command, it performs a check process of the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921, and then starts the game control process. . If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 indicates an on state, RAM clear processing or the like is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a payout start command immediately before checking the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921, and the payout control CPU 659 confirms the payout start command and outputs an output signal from the clear switch 921. The state check process is performed. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 starts the payout start command transmission process by executing the security check process and the software delay process, the payout control CPU 659 waits for the payout start command to be transmitted. It has become.

  Thus, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921 even though the payout control CPU 659 checks the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921. It is prevented that the situation of not occurring. Conversely, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921, but the payout control CPU 659 does not check the state of the output signal from the clear switch 921. This situation is prevented from occurring. That is, the contents of each storage means in both the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer can be reliably initialized based on the operation of the operation means.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply gradually decreases. However, when the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply falls below a predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal (low level). ). The power-off signal is input to the main board 31, the payout control board 100, and the effect control board 80. The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 100, and the effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 80 are: In response to the output of the power-off signal, a power supply stop process (also referred to as a power-off control process) is executed. Then, the power monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when VCC falls below a predetermined value. The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 100, and the effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 80 are: The system is reset in response to the reset signal becoming low level. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control CPU 659, and the effect control microcomputer 118 are not operated. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the power supply cutoff signal is output when the power supply voltage decreases.

  Next, the random number circuit setting process (step S15) in the main process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing random number circuit setting processing. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and from among the random number circuits 503a and 503b built in the game control microcomputer 560, A random number circuit to be used when executing the timer interrupt process including the control process is set (step S151). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores, in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, specification information for specifying the random number circuit 503 used when executing a timer interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 selects either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b according to the designation information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, and uses the selected random number circuit when executing the timer interrupt process. Set as a random number circuit. Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer may perform a jackpot determination based on a random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and may perform a probability change determination based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. .

  When the random number circuit 503 used in step S151 is set, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the operation of the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524, for example, so that the counter of the random number circuit that is set not to be used is used. 521 prevents the count value C from being updated. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the count value C of the counter 521 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used, but the game control microcomputer 560 does not output the output control signal SC. The random number value storage circuit 531 may be controlled so as not to read the random number. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 prevents the random value fetch data “01h” from being written into the random value fetch register 539 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used. Control may be performed so that the latch signal SL is not output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  As described above, by setting the random number circuit 503 to be used, by setting only the random number circuit 503 to be used, it is possible to appropriately set the range of the random number value to be generated. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when a big hit determination is performed using a determination table including a distant value (for example, “1” and “100”) as a big hit determination value, the big hit is determined with a predetermined big hit probability (eg, 1/100). As a result, the number of types of determination values to be processed is smaller when the random number by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is used than when the random number by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, and the game control microcomputer 560 is used. The control burden is reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number maximum value setting module 551a included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and generates random number maximum value setting data for designating a random number maximum value preset by the user as a random number maximum value setting register 535. (Step S152). By doing so, the random number maximum value of random R preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503. When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value designating the random number maximum value (any value from “0” to “4095”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. Further, when the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value for designating the maximum random number value (any value from “0” to “65535”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  In this embodiment, when “0” to “255” are set as the random number maximum value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later. Even when control is performed to write a value greater than “256” as the random number maximum value, values “0” to “255” are set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 due to garbled data or the like. In the case where it is lost, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later.

  As described above, since the maximum value of the random number to be generated is set in advance in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152, a random number having a value larger than the range of random numbers used during execution of the timer interrupt process is generated. Can be prevented, and the processing load on the random number circuit 503 and the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 checks whether the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152 is not less than a predetermined lower limit value. If the random number maximum value is not more than the lower limit value, the random number maximum value setting register The random number maximum value resetting process for resetting the random number maximum value set in 535 is executed (step S153).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a process according to the initial value change module 551e included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and executes an initial value change process for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step). S154).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number update method selection module 551b included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number update method selection data in the random number update method selection register 540 (step S155). By doing so, the random number update method of the random number circuit 503 is set. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “10h” in the random number update method selection register 540. That is, in this embodiment, the second random number update method is set as the random number update method of the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the cycle setting module 551c included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and sets the cycle setting data (the reference clock signal by how many minutes) that specifies the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user. The data for setting whether to circulate) is written in the period setting register 537 (step S156). By doing so, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S157). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a setting value indicating whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521. And stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Whether or not the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value according to a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55. Set up. In this embodiment, when the CPU 56 determines in step S157 that the initial value input to the counter 521 is to be updated, the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (when a notification signal is input from the counter 521). An initial value update flag indicating that the initial value is updated is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S158). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a preset value indicating whether or not to change the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 in accordance with a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55. Set whether or not. In this embodiment, if the CPU 56 determines in step S158 that the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 is to be changed, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value. The indicated count value permutation change flag is set. In this embodiment, the case where the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 according to a predetermined set value will be described. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number circuit activation data “80h” in the random number circuit activation register 541 (step S159). By doing so, the game control microcomputer 560 activates the random number circuit 503.

  Next, the random number maximum value resetting process (step S153) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the random number maximum value resetting process. In the random number maximum value resetting process, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 (step S153a). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  The game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the read random number maximum value is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (step S153b). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, the maximum random number that can be set in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is from “256” to “4095”. It is determined whether or not the random number maximum value read from is less than or equal to the lower limit value “256”. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, the maximum random number that can be set in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is from “256” to “65535”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from the register 535 is equal to or lower than the lower limit “256”.

  When the read random number maximum value is less than or equal to the lower limit value, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 to a predetermined value (step S153c). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, the CPU 56 determines that the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is equal to or less than the lower limit “256”, the CPU 56 determines the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value set in is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, if it is determined that the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is equal to or less than the lower limit “256”, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value. The random number maximum value set in the register 535 is reset to a predetermined value “65535”.

  As described above, when the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number due to a malfunction of the game control microcomputer 560 or an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal for the game machine. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a random number having an excessively small value range from the minimum value to the maximum value is generated.

  Next, the initial value changing process (step S154) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the initial value changing process. In the initial value changing process, the CPU 56 first reads the initial value changing method setting data stored in the area 1F97h in the user program execution data area, and specifies the initial value changing method selected by the user. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the read initial value changing method setting data is “01h” (step S154a), thereby specifying the initial value changing method selected by the user.

  When the value of the initial value change method setting data is “01h”, the CPU 56 sets the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 to a value set based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560. Change (step S154b). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculation value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In step S154b, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. Further, for example, in step S154b, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, the ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “100”). The initial value of the count value is set to the calculated value (for example, “200”). When the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag indicating that the initial value of the count value has been changed (step S154c).

  When the game control microcomputer 560 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S154b, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and based on the ID number. It is determined whether or not the set value is greater than or equal to the random number maximum value. When it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the game control microcomputer 560 does not change the initial value input to the counter 521 (for example, the initial value is “0”). Do not change). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If the value of the initial value change method setting data is not “01h” in step S154a (that is, the value of the initial value change method setting data stored in the area 1F97h of the user program execution data area is “00h”). In the case), the CPU 56 does not change the initial value of the count value, ends the initial value changing process as it is, and proceeds to step S155.

  By executing the random number circuit setting process, various signals are input to the random number circuit 503 when the timer interrupt process including the game control process is performed, and various signals are generated in the random number circuit 503. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random number circuit 503 and the timing at which each signal is generated in the random number circuit 503.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the clock circuit 501 increases the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at predetermined intervals (timing T11, T21,... Shown in FIG. 39). A reference clock signal CLK (see FIG. 39A) is input to 503.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK supplied from the clock circuit 501 to generate a random number generating clock signal SI1 (see FIG. 39B). For example, the clock signal output circuit 524 raises the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at timings T11, T12,..., And changes the signal level from the high level to the low level at timings T21, T22,. To output a random number generating clock signal SI1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, the clock signal output circuit 524 generates a random number generating clock signal SI1 by dividing the reference clock signal CLK by two for easy understanding. However, in the actual random number circuit, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is from “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”. Therefore, in an actual random number circuit, the clock signal output circuit 524 is set in the cycle setting register 537 in a range from “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 256”. The reference clock signal CLK is divided by a division ratio corresponding to the cycle setting data “07h” to “FFh” to generate a random number generating clock signal SI1. The random number generating clock signal SI 1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532.

  In this embodiment, since the second random number update method is set in the random number circuit setting process, the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 to the selector 528. When the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 selects the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs it to the counter 521. . The counter 521 updates the count value C and outputs it to the count value permutation change circuit 523 every time the rising edge of the random number generation clock signal SI1 supplied from the selector 528 is input.

  The inversion circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 (see FIG. 39C) by inverting the signal level of the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. For example, the inverting circuit 532 lowers the signal level of the output terminal from the high level to the low level at timings T11, T12,..., And the signal level from the low level to the high level at timings T21, T22,. As a result, the inverted clock signal SI2 is output. Further, the inverted clock signal SI <b> 2 generated by the inverting circuit 532 is output to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 milliseconds) elapses after the winning detection signal SS (see FIG. 39D) is input to the latch circuit generation circuit 533, the random number value read signal output circuit 526 generates a disturbance. A numerical reading signal is input. For example, when the signal level of the output terminal of the random number read signal output circuit 526 rises from a low level to a high level, the random value read signal is input to the latch signal generation circuit 533. The latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random number read signal input from the random number read signal output circuit 526 in response to the input of the second random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. A latch signal SL (see FIG. 39E) is output in synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 supplied from 532.

  As described above, the random number circuit 503 updates the count value C at the timings T11, T12, T13... And outputs the latch signal SL at the timing T22 different from the timings T11, T12, T13. The random number value is stored in 531.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining a timer interrupt processing program. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, during a period in which the interrupt is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of an interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 560 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) ( Step S21).

  Next, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 20a, the second start port switch 20b, the first count switch 22a, and the second count switch 22b are input via the switch relay board 95, These state determinations are performed (step S22). Specifically, if the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is ON, the value of a switch timer provided for each switch is incremented by one.

  In step S22a, a display control process is performed. In the display control process, the drive signals for controlling the display states of the first variable display device 8A, the second variable display device 8B, and the normal symbol display device 10, and the lighting states of the start memory LED 9 and the normal symbol start memory LED 11 are controlled. A process for outputting a drive signal for the purpose is performed. Further, a process of outputting a signal set in a special symbol display control process (step S33), a normal symbol display control process (step S34), and a status indicator display process (step S34a) described later is also performed.

  In step S22b, an abnormal winning notification process is performed. In the abnormal winning notification process, the first count switch 22a provided in the first special variable winning ball device 13A is set to the ON state even though the first special variable winning ball device 13A is not opened. The second count switch 22b provided in the second special variable winning ball device 13B is set to the on state even when the second special variable winning ball device 13B is not open. At this time, processing for setting an abnormal winning notification command for notifying that an abnormal winning is made is performed.

  In step S23, it is confirmed whether the initial value is set to be updated when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see step S157), and the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 is checked. An initial value update process is performed to update the initial value input to. In step S24, display random number update processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is performed.

  When the initial value update process and the display random number update process are performed, the game control microcomputer 560 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of count values output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503. Is performed (step S25). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the count value permutation change process is determined depending on whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 of the random number circuit setting process. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the count value permutation change process based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set.

  Next, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects the winning of the game ball to the normal winning ball device 12A or the normal variable winning ball device 12B, the numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number is stored in the random value storage circuit. A process of extracting from 531 and the like and storing it in the special figure holding memory 570 together with the start winning opening data is executed.

  In step S26a, a first special symbol process is performed. In the first special symbol process, a process is selected and executed in accordance with the value of the first special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first variable display device 8A is a combination of jackpot symbols is determined in this first special symbol process. In the big hit determination, when the count value (random number value) is read from the random value storage circuit 531 latched in the storage buffer of the RAM 55 as described above, and this count value matches a predetermined big hit determination value. Then, it is determined that it is a big hit. The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. In the first special symbol process, data for transmitting effect control commands for instructing execution of various effects, such as controlling the display state of the third variable display device 8C, is set. In the first special symbol process in the present embodiment, when a gaming machine error state signal is input from the payout control microcomputer 660, a payout prohibition command indicating that the payout is prohibited due to the occurrence of an error is issued. The setting process is performed.

  In step S26b, the second special symbol process is performed. In the second special symbol process, a process for selecting and executing the corresponding process is performed according to the value of the second special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second variable display device 8B is a combination of jackpot symbols is determined in the second special symbol process. In the big hit determination, when the count value (random number value) is read from the random value storage circuit 531 latched in the storage buffer of the RAM 55 as described above, and this count value matches a predetermined big hit determination value. Then, it is determined that it is a big hit. The value of the second special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. In the second special symbol process, data for transmitting effect control commands for instructing execution of various effects, such as controlling the display state of the fourth variable display device 8D, is set.

  In step S27, normal symbol process processing is performed. In the normal symbol process, a process for selecting and executing the corresponding process is performed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag for controlling lighting of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined manner. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  In step S28, effect symbol command control processing is performed. In the effect symbol command control process, a process of outputting various commands (including a payout prohibition command) including the effect control commands set in step S26a, step S26b, etc. to the effect control microcomputer 118 is performed. For example, in the effect symbol command control process, an effect control command for instructing variable display of a symbol such as a variable display pattern command for designating a variable display pattern of a decorative symbol is output, and over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). An effect control command (hereinafter referred to as a “demo display command”) instructing execution of a demonstration display (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a “demo display”) is also output when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is not executed. .

  In step S30, an information output process is performed. In the information output process, game information necessary for business management of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, one jackpot information for informing that the jackpot gaming state is in effect, a jackpot gaming state with a probability variation pattern, and in the jackpot gaming state and 2 jackpot information that informs that the probability change due to jackpot is in progress (a signal that is continuously output during the jackpot and the probability variation), and the probability variation information that reports that the probability change after the jackpot gaming state ends by the probability variation symbol , Time shortening information for notifying that the time shortening state after the big hit gaming state is ended, first starting port information for notifying the number of hit balls in which the first starting port switch 20a is turned on, and the second starting port switch 20b The second starting port information for notifying the number of hit balls that have been turned on, the first symbol determination number 1 information for notifying the number of fluctuation operations of the first variable display device 8A, the second variable display device 8 The second symbol fixed number of times 1 information for notifying the number of variable movements, the symbol fixed number of times 2 information for notifying the number of variable movements of the normal symbol display 10, and the number of bonuses for notifying the number of times of opening and closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B Information etc.) is output to the hall management computer installed in the game hall.

  In step S31, a prize ball process is performed. In the winning ball process, the number of winning balls is set based on a detection signal from a switch for detecting a winning at each winning opening. For example, a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 100 in response to winning detection. The payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 100 drives the ball payout device 154 in response to receiving a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls.

  In step S31a, a test terminal process is performed. In the test terminal processing, the setting during special symbol change, per special symbol, the first special variable winning ball device 13A, the second special variable winning ball device 13B, the setting during operation, the setting during operation of the normal variable winning ball device 12B, Processing for outputting each signal such as setting of the probability variation state and setting during normal symbol variation is executed.

  In step S31b, an output process is performed. In the output process, an output process for outputting a drive signal for driving the corresponding solenoid when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. Based on the drive signal output in the output process, the solenoid is driven, and the corresponding device is controlled to an open state or a closed state. In the output process, for example, tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B, opening / closing control of the opening / closing plate in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 13A and the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B, and the like are performed.

  In step S32, a storage process is performed. In the storage process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the lighting state of the start memory LED 9 and the normal symbol start memory LED 11 is performed.

  In step S33, a special symbol display control process is performed. In the special symbol display control process, a process of setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is performed. In step S34, a normal symbol display control process is performed. In the normal symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 is performed.

  In step S34a, a status indicator display process is performed. In the status display lamp display process, a status display lamp display process for controlling the status display lamp 25 constituted by LEDs as light emitting members is performed. In the state display lamp display process in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the variation time reduction state, the state display lamp timer is updated, the blinking setting of the state display lamp 25, and the state display lamp 25 are performed. A process for setting the flashing speed of the game is performed, and the game state can be grasped by visually checking the state display lamp 25. In step S35, processing for setting the interrupt permitted state is performed. As a result, the interrupt is not enabled until all timer interrupt processing is executed, so no other interrupts or next timer interrupts are generated, and all timer interrupt processing is in progress. Each process can be reliably completed.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed. Moreover, the process of step S1-step S34a is equivalent to the game control process which controls progress of a game.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the power-off process in step S21. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) (step S450). If not on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 55 is cleared to 0 (step S451). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer is incremented by 1 (step S452). If the value of the backup monitoring timer matches the determination value (for example, 2) (step S453), the power supply stop processing after step S454, that is, the preparation processing for power supply stop is executed. That is, the state shifts from the state in which the progress of the game is controlled to the state in which the power supply stop process (power-off control process) for saving the game state (game state data) is executed. Note that “formed in the RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even when the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S8 in the main process, it is possible to confirm that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same value as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 creates parity data (steps S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S455). Further, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S458), the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S459), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (step S460). Then, the processing from step S457 to step S460 is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S471). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The game control microcomputer 560 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S473). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S474), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the address of the output port) is loaded (step S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S476), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S474. If the number of processes is 0 (step S480), that is, if all output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S481), and the loop process is entered.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (step S482). When the power-off signal is turned off, the execution address at power-on (address of step S1) is set as a return address and a return instruction is executed (step S483), and a timer allocation is performed by RETI (Return from interrupt). The process ends, and the process returns to the main process. Specifically, a state in which a gaming device provided in the gaming machine is controlled (a concept including both controlling by itself and sending a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control). Return.

  Further, in the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the reset signal is turned on at a low level (step S484). When the reset signal is turned on, that is, when the game control microcomputer 560 confirms that the reset signal is turned on, the game control microcomputer 560 enters the system reset state (system Reset). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is returned to the operation stop state which is the start state. As described above, the voltage level of the detection voltage for turning on the reset signal in the present embodiment is set to +4.5 V, which is higher than the drive voltage (for example, 4 V) of the game control microcomputer 560. Thereby, the game control microcomputer 560 is actively stopped even when a voltage higher than the drive voltage is still supplied.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop processing in steps S454 to S481 is executed, and data indicating that the power supply stop processing has been executed (specified value with backup and checksum) ) Is stored in the backup RAM, RAM access is disabled, the output port is cleared, and the timer interrupt for executing the game control process is disabled.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). In this example, the checksum based on the contents of the RAM 55 when the power-off signal is output is stored in the backup area of the RAM 55 together with the value of the backup monitoring timer by the processing in steps S452 to S479. After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the data stored in the RAM 55 (the game control microcomputer immediately before the power supply is stopped) by the processing in steps S91 to S94 described above. In accordance with data indicating a gaming state that is a control state by 560 (including process flag state, big hit flag state, probability variation flag state, output port output state, etc.), the power supply is stopped for the gaming state. You can return to the previous state. Note that if the power supply stop period exceeds the predetermined period, the value of the backup monitoring timer and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process of steps S10 to S12 is executed. Is done.

  As described above, the data for returning the gaming state to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped is reliably stored in a part of the RAM 55 by the power supply stop process (preparation process for power supply stop). Is done. Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the gaming state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped.

  If the power-off signal is turned off, the process returns to step S1. In that case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the game state recovery process of steps S91 to S94 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal from the payout control board 100 is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the game control process does not stop, and the game control process is automatically continued.

  The connection confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 100 is set to the off state by the process of clearing the output port. Further, in the setting of the work area in step S92 and step S12, the content of the output port buffer corresponding to the connection confirmation signal is set to a value corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal. When the prize ball processing in step S31 is executed, the contents of the output port buffer are output to the output port, so that the connection confirmation signal to the payout control board 100 is turned on. Therefore, the connection confirmation signal is output (turned on) when the main board 31 rises. Note that a connection confirmation signal is also output when the power supply is recovered from an instantaneous power interruption or the like.

  Next, the initial value update process (step S22) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the initial value update process. In the initial value update process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S220). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the initial value update flag is set (step S221). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the setting for updating the initial value is made when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see step S157). .

  When the initial value update flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. To do. If the initial value update flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the initial value change flag is set (step S222). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the initial value of the count value is currently changed (that is, whether or not it is changed to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560).

  When the initial value change flag is set (that is, the initial value is currently changed based on the value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560), the game control microcomputer 560 inputs the initial value to the counter 521. The value is returned to the original value (for example, “1”) from the value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (step S223). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the initial value change flag (step S224), and ends the initial value update process.

  When the initial value change flag is not set (that is, the initial value is not currently changed), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the initial value input to the counter 521 as the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. The value is changed to the original value (step S225). In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the initial value input to the counter 521 is calculated by adding a predetermined value “100” to the ID number “100”. Change to the value “200”. Further, for example, the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100”. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an initial value change flag (step S226), and ends the initial value update process.

  When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, in step S225, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the random number read from one random number circuit (for example, the 12-bit random number circuit 503a). An initial value input to the counter 521 may be obtained by adding the ID number as a predetermined value. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 may use the random number read from the other one (for example, the 16-bit random number circuit 503b) as the random number for determining the big hit.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S225, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and based on the ID number. It is determined whether or not the set value is greater than or equal to the random number maximum value. When it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the game control microcomputer 560 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521 with the predetermined value (for example, the predetermined value “ 0 ”is not updated). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If it is determined in step S220 that the notification signal is in the OFF state, or if it is determined in step S221 that the initial value update flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 inputs the initial value to the counter 521. Without updating the initial value update process, the process proceeds to step S23.

  Next, the count value permutation change process (step S24) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the count value permutation changing process. The game control microcomputer 560 executes the count value permutation change process by executing the process according to the count value permutation change program 554. In the count value permutation changing process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S241). When it is detected that the notification signal is turned on, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set (step S242). That is, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 has been set to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process ( Confirm step S158).

  When the count value permutation change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Judge to change. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536 (step S243). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of the count values C input to the random value storage circuit 531 by writing the count value permutation change data “01h”.

  As described above, in the count value permutation change process, when the random number is updated to a predetermined final value, the permutation of the count value updated by the counter 521 is changed, so that the randomness generated by the random number circuit 503 is more random. Can be improved.

  Next, a method for sending a control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 will be described. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, the effect control command (specifically, the effect control signal constituting the effect control command) has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification). The second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing how to send the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 46, the 8-bit effect control signal of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control means, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a capture signal that triggers the capture of the effect control signal.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 118 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable, for example, in accordance with the first and second bytes of the effect control signal. The effect control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 47, the command 80XX (h) is a first variable display pattern command transmitted when variable display of a special symbol is started by the first variable display device 8A. In the following, it is assumed that XX (h) is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and is a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. The command 81XX (h) is a second variable display pattern command transmitted when variable display of special symbols by the second variable display device 8B is started. Each of these first and second variable display pattern commands has a special symbol variable display time which is a time from when the special symbol variable display is started to when the confirmed symbol is stopped and displayed, or variable display in a special game. EXT data indicating whether the result is a big hit or a loss, whether or not the decorative symbol during variable display is to be reached, and the like are included.

  Here, the variable symbol display time of the special symbol is derived from the time point when the variable symbol special display is started in one special symbol game (variable display start point), and the final symbol variable display time is displayed. This is the execution time of the special figure game required up to the point of stop display. Reach is a display mode in which variable display is performed for symbols that have not yet been derived and displayed (referred to as reach variation symbols) when the symbols that have been derived and displayed constitute part of the jackpot combination, or This is a display mode in which all or some of the symbols are synchronously variably displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol. Specifically, on the combination effective line that has not been stopped yet when the symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on some of the variable display portions on the predetermined combination effective line. Display mode in which variable display is performed in the variable display portion (for example, the left, middle and right variable display portions of the left, middle, and right variable display portions provided in the display area become part of the jackpot symbol ( For example, “7”) is displayed in a stopped state and the variable display section on the right is still displaying a variable display), or all or some of the symbols on the variable display section on the effective line are jackpot symbols. The display mode (for example, the left, middle, and right variable display portions provided in the display area are variablely displayed to indicate which state is displayed in a variable manner while forming all or part of The same special design even if it is done A variable display mode the display is performed) in a manner that are. On the side of the production control board 80, for example, in response to receiving the first variable display pattern command, the variable display pattern command is started by the third variable display device 8C, while the second variable display pattern command is received. In response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D is started.

  The command 90XX (h) is a first variable display end command transmitted when the variable display of the special symbol in the first variable display device 8A is ended. The command 91XX (h) is a second variable display end command transmitted when the variable display of the special symbol by the second variable display device 8B ends. On the side of the production control board 80, for example, in response to receiving the first variable display end command, the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the third variable display device 8C is decelerated / stopped to become a definite symbol. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed, and the decorative symbol variably displayed on the fourth variable display device 8D is decelerated and stopped in response to receiving the second variable display end command. A combination of decorative designs is derived and displayed. The first variable display end command and the second variable display end command may be configured not to be transmitted. In this case, when the variable display time instructed by the first variable display pattern command on the side of the effect control board 80 has elapsed, the third variable display device 8C is made to display and display the fixed symbol, while the second variable display pattern The fixed symbol may be derived and displayed on the fourth variable display device 8D when the variable display time designated by the command has elapsed.

  The command A000 (h) is controlled to the big hit gaming state due to the big hit in the special game by either the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B, and then the big hit gaming state ends. It is a jackpot end command transmitted when The command B000 (h) is a variable display progress stop command transmitted when the progress of variable display of special symbols in the second variable display device 8B is stopped (interrupted). On the side of the effect control board 80, for example, in response to receiving a variable display progress stop command, the progress of variable display of decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D is stopped (interrupted). Command B100 (h) is a variable display progress restart command that is transmitted when the progress of variable display of special symbols is started again in the special figure game in which the progress of variable display is stopped. On the side of the effect control board 80, for example, in response to receiving a variable display progress restart command, the progress of variable display of decorative symbols that has been stopped (suspended) by the fourth variable display device 8D is restarted.

  A command (first variable display progress stop command) transmitted when stopping the progress of the special symbol in the first variable display device 8A and a command transmitted when stopping the progress of the special symbol in the second variable display device 8B. The command (second variable display progress stop command) may be individually provided. In addition, a command (first variable display progress resuming command) transmitted when the progress of the variable display of the special symbol is started again in the special figure game in which the progress of the variable display is stopped by the first variable display device 8A. A command (second variable display progress restart command) that is transmitted when the progress of variable display of the special symbol is restarted in the special figure game in which the progress of variable display is stopped in the second variable display device 8B; It is good also as a structure provided individually.

  Command C000 (H) is a start command transmitted when the probability variation state is started. Command C0001 (H) is an end command transmitted when the special gaming state (the probability variation state and the time reduction state) is ended. Command C100 (H) is a short time start command that is transmitted when the probability variation state is terminated and the time reduction state is started. These commands are transmitted to the effect control board 80 in the effect symbol command control process (step S28).

  The command D001 (H) is a recovery command transmitted when the recovery process is performed. Command E000 (H) is a first payout number command transmitted when four payouts are made in accordance with winning. The command E001 (H) is a second payout number command transmitted when 7 payouts are made in accordance with the winning. Command E002 (H) is a third payout number command transmitted when 15 payouts are made in accordance with winning. After the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the prize ball control signal to the payout control microcomputer 660, the first payout number command indicates the same number as the number of payouts specified by the prize ball control signal at a predetermined timing. Any one of the third payout number commands is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 118 as an effect control command.

  Command F000 (H) is a first demonstration display command for instructing execution of demonstration display in the third variable display device 8C. Command F001 (H) is a second demonstration display command for instructing execution of demonstration display in the fourth variable display device 8D. The first demonstration display command is transmitted when a special symbol on the first variable display device 8A and a variable symbol on the third variable display device 8C are not displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). The display command is transmitted when the special symbol display on the second variable display device 8B and the decorative symbol variable display on the fourth variable display device 8D are not executed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 mounted on the main board 31 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 54 stores a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to perform various determinations and determinations. This determination table includes a jackpot determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the confirmed symbol is a jackpot symbol in the special figure game. In addition, the decision table is used for special display games by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B, and for variable display of decorative symbols by the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D, respectively. A variable display pattern determination table for determining a variable display pattern to be displayed is included. This variable display pattern determination table can be used for variable display of special symbols by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B and variable display of decorative symbols by the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D. Data indicating a plurality of types of variable display patterns is stored. For example, the variable display pattern determination table is a selection that enables selection of the variable display pattern based on the value of the variable display pattern determination random number by associating each variable display pattern with the value of the variable display pattern determination random number. What is necessary is just to be comprised from data.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of normal variable display patterns are prepared as variable display patterns for deriving and displaying the lost symbols in the normal game state other than the special game state or the specific game state without reaching the decorative symbols. ing. Also, a plurality of special time variable display patterns are prepared as variable display patterns for deriving and displaying the lost symbols without reaching the decorative symbols in the special game state. In addition, a plurality of reach variable display patterns are prepared as reach-losing variable display patterns for deriving and displaying lost symbols without reaching a big hit symbol after reaching the decorative symbol. As a variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol as a fixed symbol in the special game and deriving and displaying the jackpot combination decoration pattern, a plurality of types of variable display patterns for the jackpot are prepared. The data indicating each variable display pattern in the variable display pattern determination table is, for example, the variable display time of the special symbol in the variable display pattern determination table or in a variable display pattern setting table different from the variable display pattern determination table. And control data set as EXT data by the first and second variable display pattern commands.

  As a specific example of the variable display pattern determination table, in this embodiment, the normal time variable display pattern determination table 150 shown in FIG. 48A and the special time variable display pattern determination table 151 shown in FIG. A reach variable display pattern determination table 152 shown in FIG. 48C and a big hit variable display pattern determination table 153 shown in FIG. 48D are stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54 or the like.

  The normal A and normal B variable display patterns, which are the normal variable display patterns determined using the normal variable display pattern determination table 150 shown in FIG. 48A, are normal games other than the specific game state and the special game state. In the state, it is used when a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable symbol display result as a special symbol variable display result without setting the variable symbol display mode of the special symbol during the variable symbol variable display. As shown in FIG. 48A, the variable symbol display times of the special symbols in the normal A and normal B variable display patterns are Ti1 and Ti2, respectively.

  The normal C variable display pattern and the normal D variable display pattern determined using the special variable display pattern determination table 151 shown in FIG. 48B are special games such as a probability variation state and a time reduction state. In the state, it is used when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable symbol display result without changing the decorative symbol variable display mode during the variable symbol variable display. As shown in FIG. 48B, the variable display times of the special symbols in the normal C and normal D variable display patterns are Ti3 and Ti4, respectively. Here, the special symbol variable display time Ti4 in the normal D variable display pattern is set to be shorter than the special symbol variable display times Ti1 and Ti2 in the normal A and normal B variable display patterns. Yes. The special symbol variable display time Ti3 in the normal C variable display pattern is longer than the special symbol variable display time Ti1 in the normal A variable display pattern, and the special B variable display pattern in the normal B variable display pattern. It is assumed that the time is shorter than the symbol variable display time Ti2.

  Here, when the variable display pattern is determined using the special time variable display pattern determination table 151 shown in FIG. 48B, the normal D variable display pattern is higher than the normal C variable display pattern. Thus, the variable display pattern in the special display game and the variable display of the decorative design is determined. Further, when the variable display pattern is determined using the normal variable display pattern determination table 150 shown in FIG. 48A, the normal B variable display pattern is higher in proportion than the normal A variable display pattern. The variable display pattern in the special display game and the variable display of the decorative design is determined. As a result, on average, the special symbol variable display time in the special game is shorter in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time reduction state than in the normal game state. All the variable display patterns determined using the special variable display pattern determination table 151 shown in FIG. 48B are determined using the normal variable display pattern determination table 150 shown in FIG. It may be set in advance so that the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than any variable display pattern.

  The variable display patterns of reach A (losing) to D (losing), which are variable display patterns during reaching determined using the variable display pattern determining table 152 during reaching shown in FIG. This is used to stop and display a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol after the variable symbol pattern display mode is set to reach. As shown in FIG. 48C, the variable display times of the special symbols in the variable display patterns of reach A (losing) to D (losing) are Ti11, Ti12, Ti13, and Ti14, respectively.

  The variable display patterns of reach A (big hit) to D (big hit) which are variable display patterns for big hit determined using the big hit variable display pattern determination table 153 shown in FIG. This is used when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol after the display mode of the decorative symbol is set to reach. As shown in FIG. 48D, the variable display times of the special symbols in the variable display patterns of reach A (big hit) to D (big hit) are Ti21, Ti22, Ti23, and Ti24, respectively.

  In the variable display patterns of reach A to D, for example, the display mode after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to reach during the variable display of the special symbol is different. That is, depending on whether the variable display pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is reach A to D, the special symbol can be variably displayed in a different variable display mode after reaching reach. A different character image appears.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S25a illustrated in FIG. 40 as the start winning process. In this start winning process, the CPU 56 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 20a for detecting a game ball in the normal winning ball device 12A as to whether or not a game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A. This is determined by checking or the like (step S201). When the game ball wins the normal winning ball device 12A and the detection signal from the first start port switch 20a is turned on (step S201; Yes), the reserved memory number indicated by the start winning memory counter (or It is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories stored in the special figure reservation memory 570 has reached an upper limit (eg, “8”) (step S202). At this time, when the value of the big hit determination random number is stored in the special figure holding memory 570 in association with the maximum value of the holding number, it is determined that the holding memory number has reached the upper limit value.

  When the reserved storage number is less than the upper limit value (step S202; No), the game control microcomputer 560 executes the timer interrupt process indicated by the first interrupt execution number counter a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). ) Or not (step S203). When the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first interrupt execution counter to a predetermined number of times after the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A. Check if it has been reached.

  The value preset as the predetermined number of times in step S203 is determined as follows. As described above, the timer circuit 534 of the random number circuit 503 measures the time that the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the first start port switch 20a, and detects that the measurement time has reached a predetermined period. Then, the random value fetch data “01h” is written. In this embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) measured by the timer circuit 534 is a period in which a predetermined number of timer interrupt processes are executed (for example, when the timer interrupt process for every 2 ms is executed three times). The predetermined number (for example, 3 times) used in step S203 is set so as to be shorter than 6 ms). With this setting, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the random number value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. It can be prevented that a random number having the same value as the random number read from the memory circuit 531 is read again.

  When the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number, the CPU 56 can output the output control signal SC to the random number storage circuit 531 of the specified random number circuit 503 and read the random number storage circuit 531 (enable). The state is controlled (step S204a).

  The CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (step S204b). Further, the CPU 56 stores the read random R value in, for example, a predetermined buffer area provided in the RAM 55 (step S204c). When the CPU 56 stores the value of the random R in the buffer area, the CPU 56 stops outputting the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 and controls the random value storage circuit 531 to be unreadable (disabled) (step). S204d). Further, the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution number counter (step S204e). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of the random R stored in the predetermined buffer area to the head of the empty entry in the special figure holding memory 570 (step S204f), and adds 1 to the count number of the start winning storage counter to hold the value. The number is increased by 1 (step S204g). In step S204f, the CPU 56 sets the value of the random R together with the start winning slot data “first” indicating that the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A, which is the first starting winning port, and the special figure holding memory. Set to the beginning of the empty entry at 570. At this time, the lighting control of the start memory LED 9 may be performed such that one of the LEDs that are turned off in the start memory LED 9 (for example, the leftmost LED among the LEDs that are turned off) is turned on. Good.

  If the first start port switch 20a is not turned on in step S201, or if the number of reserved memories has reached the maximum value of 8 in step S202, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number in step S203. If there is no game ball and the process of step S204g is completed, the second variable start ball switch 12B detects whether or not the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 12B. The determination is made by checking the detection signal from 20b (step S206). When the game ball wins the normal variable winning ball device 12B and the detection signal from the second start port switch 20b is turned on (step S206; Yes), the number of reserved memories indicated by the start winning memory counter (or Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories stored in the special figure reservation memory 570 has reached an upper limit (for example, “8”) (step S207).

  When the number of reserved memories is less than the upper limit value (step S207; No), the game control microcomputer 560 executes the timer interruption process indicated by the second interruption execution number counter a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). ) Or not (step S208). When it is detected that the game ball has won the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 12B, the game control microcomputer 560 has a second interrupt execution number counter predetermined after the game ball has won the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 12B. Check if the number of times has been reached.

  The value preset as the predetermined number of times in step S208 is determined as follows. As described above, the timer circuit 534 of the random number circuit 503 measures the time that the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the second start port switch 20b, and detects that the measurement time has reached a predetermined period. Then, the random value fetch data “01h” is written. In this embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) measured by the timer circuit 534 is a period in which a predetermined number of timer interrupt processes are executed (for example, when the timer interrupt process every 2 ms is executed three times). The predetermined number of times (for example, three times) used in step S208 is set so as to be shorter than 6 ms). With this setting, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the random number value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. It can be prevented that a random number having the same value as the random number read from the memory circuit 531 is read again.

  When the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number, the CPU 56 can output the output control signal SC to the random number storage circuit 531 of the specified random number circuit 503 and read the random number storage circuit 531 (enable). The state is controlled (step S209a).

  The CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (step S209b). Further, the CPU 56 stores the read random R value in, for example, a predetermined buffer area provided in the RAM 55 (step S209c). Further, when the random value R is stored in the buffer area, the CPU 56 stops outputting the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 and controls the random value storage circuit 531 to be in a non-readable (disabled) state (step). S209d), the interrupt execution number counter is reset (step S209e). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of random R stored in the predetermined buffer area to the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation memory 570 (step S209f), and adds 1 to the count number of the start winning storage counter to hold storage. The number is increased by 1 (step S209g). In step S209f, the CPU 56 sets the value of the random R together with the start winning opening data “second” indicating that the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B, which is the second starting winning opening, with a special figure pending. Set to the beginning of the empty entry in the memory 570. At this time, the lighting control of the start memory LED 9 may be performed such that one of the LEDs that are turned off in the start memory LED 9 (for example, the leftmost LED among the LEDs that are turned off) is turned on. Good.

  If the second start port switch 20b is not turned on in step S206, or if the number of reserved memories has reached the maximum value of 8 in step S207, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number in step S208. If not, and if the process of step S209g is terminated, the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the start winning process, when reading the random R from the random value storage circuit 531, the timer interrupt process has been executed a predetermined number of times (that is, the timer interrupt process is continued for a predetermined number of times). The random number is read from the random value storage circuit 531 on condition that the winning detection signal SS is input). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Further, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number value storage circuit 531 from being read again.

  In this embodiment, the sum of the number of reserved memories of the first variable display device 8A and the number of reserved memories of the second variable display device 8B reaches the upper limit of 8 in step S202 and step S207. Whether the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B are stored separately is stored separately. In step S202, the first variable display device 8A is stored. It is determined whether or not the storage number has reached four as the upper limit value in the first variable display device 8A, and in step S207, the reserved storage number in the second variable display device 8A is the upper limit value in the second variable display device 8B. It may be configured to determine whether or not the number of four has been reached.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S26a shown in FIG. 40 as the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 50, according to the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting area such as the RAM 55 corresponding to the first variable display device 8A, the following Each process of step S110-step S116 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0”. This special symbol normal processing starts a special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A based on numerical data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot determination stored in the special symbol holding memory 570 together with the start winning opening data “first”. The process etc. which determine whether to do are included. The variable display start process in step S111 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “1”. This variable display start process is a process of setting a fixed symbol that is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of a special symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A, or a special symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A. This includes a process for determining the variable display time of the symbol. Corresponding to the variable display time of the fixed symbol or special symbol set in step S111, the control data is set in the predetermined command transmission table, for example, the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. One variable display pattern command is set to be transmittable. Thereafter, the effect symbol command control process of step S28 shown in FIG. 40 is executed, whereby the first variable display pattern command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  The variable display control process of step S112 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. This variable display control process corresponds to the first variable display device 8A, based on the timer value in the first variable display time timer 122A, the remaining variable display time of the special symbol in the special game by the first variable display device 8A. The process etc. which measure are included. The variable display stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. This variable display stop process is a process for performing a setting for transmitting to the effect control board 80 a first variable display end command indicating that the variable display of the special symbol by the first variable display device 8A ends. Is included.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big prize opening includes an initialization process in the big hit operation such as opening / closing the opening / closing plate in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 13A. The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big prize opening includes various processes related to the big hit operation such as opening / closing the opening / closing plate in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 13A and the opening time per time in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 13A. Includes processing to check. The big hit end process in step S116 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “6”. In this jackpot ending process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot operation by the first special variable winning ball apparatus 13A is finished, and if it is finished, a process of transmitting a jackpot finish command for instructing the effect control board 80 to finish the jackpot gaming state. Etc.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. When the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 51 is started, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the second special symbol process flag is “4” or more, for example, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is determined whether or not the state is controlled (step S230). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S230; Yes), it is determined that the start condition (first start condition) for starting the special game by the first variable display device 8A is not satisfied. Then, the special symbol normal process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S230; No), it is determined whether or not the first reserved memory number in the special figure reservation memory 570 is “0” (step S231). ). For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number is “0” by reading a count value in a counter provided for the special figure reserved memory 570 to count the first reserved memory number. Also good. Alternatively, the first winning memory number becomes “0” by reading the starting winning data stored in the special figure holding memory 570 and determining whether or not the starting winning data “first” is included. It may be determined whether or not. When it is determined that the first reserved storage number is “0” (step S231; Yes), the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the first reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), “1” is set as an initial value to the variable k for checking the storage contents of the special figure reservation memory 570. (Step S232). Subsequently, the starting prize opening data stored in the special figure holding memory 570 in association with the holding number “k” is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the starting prize opening data “first” ( Step S233). When the start winning opening data read in step S233 is not the starting winning opening data “first” indicating the winning of the game ball to the normal winning ball apparatus 12A which is the first starting winning opening (step S233; No), the variable After 1 is added to the value of k (step S234), the process returns to step S233.

  When it is determined that the start prize opening data read in step S233 is the start prize opening data indicating “first” (step S233; Yes), the special figure holding memory 570 corresponds to the holding number “k”. The attached stored data is read (step S235). At this time, 1 is subtracted from the first reserved storage number in the special figure reservation memory 570, and the stored data stored in the entry lower than the reservation number “k” is shifted up by one entry (step S236). . When subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory number in step S236, for example, one of the LEDs that are lit in the start memory LED 9 (for example, the rightmost LED among the lit LEDs) is turned off. Alternatively, the start-up storage LED 9 may be turned off.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes a probability variation end determination process for determining whether or not to end the probability variation state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability variation state by the probability variation control (step S237). FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the probability variation end determination process executed in step S237. In the probability variation end determination process shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S401). When the probability change flag is off, the probability change end determination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the probability changing flag is on (step S401; Yes), for example, numerical data indicating the value of the probability changing end determination random number updated by the random number circuit 503 or the like is extracted (step S402). It should be noted that the random number for probability variation determination is that the game ball is detected by either the normal winning ball device 12A or the normal variable winning ball device 12B, not when the special symbol variable display in the special game is started. Sometimes it may be extracted. In this case, for example, when the numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number is extracted in step S204 or step S209 of FIG. 49, the numerical data indicating the value of the probability variation end determination random number may be extracted. The numerical data indicating the value of the random number for determining probability change extracted at this time is stored in the special figure holding memory 570 together with the numerical data indicating the value of the random number for determining the big hit and the start winning data, and the like in step S235 of FIG. It is only necessary to read out at.

  Whether or not to end the probability variation state by probability variation control based on the value of the random number for probability variation end determination extracted (or read) in this way, for example, by referring to the probability variation end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like Is determined (step S403). Here, the probability variation end determination table only needs to be configured from setting data that associates the value of the random number for probability variation end determination with the determination result of whether or not to end the probability variation state. When it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation state is not terminated (step S403; No), the probability variation termination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation state is to be ended (step S403; Yes), the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off, and the time reduction flag is set on. (Step S404), setting for transmitting a time-short start command is performed (Step S405). For example, the probability variation state data indicating “1” stored in the game control flag setting area is erased and set to “0”, while the time shortening state data indicating “1” is stored in the game control flag setting area. Let Thus, when it is determined that the probability variation state is to be ended, the probability variation state data indicating “1” is deleted at the timing when the special figure game that triggers the determination is started. It can be updated to “0”.

  After executing the probability variation end determination process as described above, the CPU 56 determines that the start condition is satisfied based on the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determination random number included in the stored data read in step S235 of FIG. A big hit / probable change determination process that determines whether or not to make a big hit by stopping and displaying the big hit symbol as a variable display result in the game, and whether to make a promising big hit or a normal big hit when making a big hit It executes (step S238). Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start time process (step S239).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit / probability change determination process executed in step S238 of FIG. When the big hit / probability change determination process shown in FIG. 53 is started, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is on (step S411). Here, the probability variation flag is in an on state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variation state by the probability variation control. When the probability changing flag is on (step S411; Yes), for example, increase determination value data indicating five numerical values “3”, “7”, “79”, “103”, and “107” is variable. As the display result, the determination value data indicating that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is set (step S412). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S411 that the probability variation flag is OFF (step S411; No), for example, normal determination value data indicating one numerical value “3” is set as determination value data ( Step S413).

  Thereafter, whether or not the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determination random number read from the special figure holding memory 570 in step S235 in FIG. 51 matches the determination value data set in step S412 or step S413. Is determined (step S414). When the numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number matches the determination value data (step S414; Yes), the first big hit flag is set to the on state (step S415).

  After the first big hit flag is set to the ON state in step S415, numerical data indicating the value of the random number for probability variation determination updated by the random number circuit 503 or the like is extracted (step S416). Subsequently, the CPU 56 determines whether the variable display result in the special game by the first variable display device 8A is a probability change big hit or a normal big hit, for example, by referring to a predetermined probability change determination table (step) S417). Here, the probability variation determination table may be configured by setting data that associates the value of the probability variation determination random number with the determination result of whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit. When it is determined in step S417 that the probability change big hit is made (step S417; Yes), the first probability change confirmation flag is set to the on state (step S418), while when it is determined that the normal big hit is made. (Step S417; No), the first certain change confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (Step S419). If it is determined in step S414 that the numerical data indicating the value of the random number for determining the big hit is different from the determined value data (step S414; No), the first big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S414). Step S420).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start time process executed in step S111 of FIG. 54, first, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a variable display result (determined symbol) in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A (step S251). At this time, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol according to a determination result of whether to win or lose in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A. For example, in step S251, it is determined whether the first big hit flag is on or off. At this time, if the first big hit flag is on, it is further determined whether the first certainty change confirmation flag is on or off. If it is on, the probability big hit symbol is determined. While the special symbol indicating “7” is determined as the confirmed symbol, when the first probability variation determination flag is off, the special symbol indicating “3”, which is the normal jackpot symbol, is determined as the confirmed symbol. To do. On the other hand, when the first big hit flag is off, the determined symbols are selected from the lost symbols other than the big hit symbols indicating “3” and “7”. As a specific example of selecting and determining a special symbol as a fixed symbol, numerical data indicating the value of the fixed symbol determining random number updated by the random number circuit 503 or the like is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like. What is necessary is just to select one of a plurality of special symbols and determine the determined symbol by referring to the fixed symbol determination table.

  Subsequently, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is on (step S252). When the first big hit flag is on (step S252; Yes), the variable display pattern in the special display game this time by the first variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C is determined. As the variable display pattern determination table used for this purpose, the big hit variable display pattern determination table 153 shown in FIG. 48D is set (step S253).

  When it is determined in step S252 that the first big hit flag is off (step S252; No), it is determined whether or not the probability changing flag is on (step S254). When the probability changing flag is off in step S254 (step S254; No), it is determined whether or not the hour / medium flag is on (step S255). When the time / short flag is OFF in step S255 (step S255; No), the reach determination table stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like is referred to based on the reach determination random number value extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like, for example. Thus, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C is to be reached (step S256). Here, the reach determination table only needs to be configured from setting data that associates the value of the random number for reach determination with the determination result as to whether or not to reach.

  When it is determined in step S256 that reach is to be made (step S256; Yes), the variable display pattern in the special display game of this time by the first variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C. As a variable display pattern determination table used to determine the reach, the reach variable display pattern determination table 152 shown in FIG. 48C is set (step S257). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S256 that the reach is not to be made (step S256; No), the present special figure game by the first variable display device 8A and the variable in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C. A normal variable display pattern determination table 150 shown in FIG. 48A is set as a variable display pattern determination table used for determining a display pattern (step S258).

  When the probability changing flag is on in step S254 (step S254; Yes), or when the time reduction flag is on in step S255 (step S255; Yes), the current special map by the first variable display device 8A is displayed. A special variable display pattern determination table 151 shown in FIG. 48B is set as a variable display pattern determination table used for determining a variable display pattern in the variable display of decorative symbols by the game and the third variable display device 8C ( Step S259). Subsequently, by executing a special game state end determination process as shown in FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the special game state such as a probability variation state or a time shortening state by probability variation control is to be ended (step). S260).

  In the special gaming state end determination process shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the count value in the variable display number counter 123 (step S431). Note that the count value of the variable display count counter 123 is set to the initial value of the variable display count during the special game, for example, in step S285 of FIG. 57 described later when the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation big hit ends. Following the processing of step S431, it is determined whether or not the count value of the variable display number counter 123 has become “0” (step S432). At this time, if the count value of the variable display number counter 123 is a value other than “0” (step S432; No), the special gaming state end determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S432 that the count value of the variable display number counter 123 is “0” (step S432; Yes), it is determined whether the probability changing flag is on (step S432). S433). When the probability changing flag is on (step S433; Yes), since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability variation state, the probability variation flag is cleared to be turned off and an end command is transmitted. For this purpose (step S434). For example, the probability variation state data indicating “1” stored in the game control flag setting area is deleted and updated to “0”. On the other hand, when the probability changing flag is off (step S433; No), since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in the time shortening state, the time shortening flag is cleared to be in the off state and the end command Is set to transmit (step S435). For example, the time shortening state data indicating “1” stored in the game control flag setting area is deleted and updated to “0”.

  Thus, after setting the variable display pattern determination table in any of step S253, step S257, and step S258 in FIG. 54, or after executing the special gaming state end determination process in step S260, for example, the random number circuit 503 or the like. The numerical data indicating the value of the variable display pattern determining random number updated by is extracted (step S261). Subsequently, the CPU 56 refers to the variable display pattern determination table set in any one of step S253, step S257, step S258, and step S259 based on the extracted variable display pattern determination random number value, thereby The variable display pattern in the special display game this time by the variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C is selected and determined (step S262).

  After the variable display pattern is determined in step S262, the first variable display pattern command is transmitted to the effect control board 80, for example, control data corresponding to the determined variable display pattern is set in a predetermined command transmission table. Is set (step S263). At this time, a timer initial value corresponding to the variable display time of the special symbol in the determined variable display pattern is set in the first variable display time timer 122A (step S264). Also, the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol by the first variable display device 8A by starting the lighting / extinguishing operation of each segment in the first variable display device 8A is performed (step S265). Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display control process (step S266).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. When the variable display stop process is started, the CPU 56 first sets predetermined control data in a predetermined command transmission table, for example, to transmit a first variable display end command to the effect control board 80. Is performed (step S271). At this time, the fixed symbol is stopped and displayed by controlling the display operation in the first variable display device 8A (step S272).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the first big hit flag is on (step S273). When the first big hit flag is on (step S273; Yes), it is determined whether or not the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B is “0” (step S274). If the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B is other than “0” in step S274, the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the special game by the second variable display device 8B. Therefore, when it is determined in step S274 that the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B is other than “0” (step S274; Yes), for example, predetermined control data is set in the command transmission table. For example, setting for transmitting a variable display progress stop command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S275). Further, the variable display progress stop flag is set to the on state (step S276). Thus, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A during the execution of the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B (first time point), Settings for interrupting the progress of variable display of special symbols in the special game by the two variable display device 8B and variable display of decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D are made. That is, after the setting for transmitting the variable display progress stop command is made in step S275, the effect symbol command control process of step S28 shown in FIG. 40 is executed, so that the main board 31 moves to the effect control board 80. When the variable display progress stop command is transmitted, a process for interrupting the progress of the variable display of decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D is executed on the effect control board 80 side. Also, after the variable display progress stop flag is set to the on state in step S276, the variable display of the special symbol by the second variable display device 8B performed using the second variable display time timer 122B is started. The measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted.

  Note that the first point in time when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result is the timing at which the decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination in the variable symbol display is stopped and displayed as the final symbol, or the symbol pattern of the jackpot combination. Any timing may be used as long as the big hit gaming state is started based on the stop display. However, the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) before the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to one special symbol game is finished is not included in the above timing, and the lottery is performed again. In this case, the timing at which the decorative symbol variable display after the re-lottery is finished and the decorative symbol that is the final symbol is completely stopped is the timing at which the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Also, if the special symbol variable display and the decorative symbol variable display in the special game are finished at the same timing and the confirmed symbol is stopped, the special symbol variable display in the special game The timing at which the special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol after the end of the process may be set as the first time point when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result.

  When it is determined in step S274 that the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B is “0” (step S274; No), the processes in steps S275 and S276 are skipped. Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S277). When it is determined in step S273 that the first big hit flag is off (step S273; No), the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “0” (step S278).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S116 of FIG. When the jackpot end process is started, the CPU 56 makes settings for transmitting a jackpot end command to the effect control board 80, for example, by setting predetermined control data in a predetermined command transmission table (step S281). Further, the first big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S282). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the first certain change determination flag is on (step S283).

  When the first certainty change confirmation flag is on in step S283 (step S283; Yes), the first certainty change confirmation flag is cleared and turned off and, for example, the probability variation indicating “1” in the game control flag setting area The probability changing flag is set to the on state by storing the state data (step S284). Further, the variable display count initial value is set in the variable display count counter 123 (step S285), and the setting for transmitting the start command is performed (step S285a). Here, the initial value of the variable display count during the special game is the initial value (for example, “100”) of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time reduction state. When the first certainty change confirmation flag is OFF in step S283 (step S283; No), the processing of step S284 and step S285 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the variable display progress stop flag is turned on (step S286). Here, when the variable display progress stop flag is on (step S286; Yes), for example, predetermined control data is set in the command transmission table, and the variable display progress restart command is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Is set (step S287). In addition, the variable display progress stop flag is cleared and turned off (step S288). Thus, when the big hit gaming state is ended (second time point), the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A. The progress of the variable display of the special symbol game special symbol by the second variable display device 8B interrupted at the time and the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the fourth variable display device 8D are resumed. When the variable display progress stop flag is OFF in step S286 (step S286; No), the progress of variable display by the second and fourth variable display devices 8D is not interrupted, so the processing of step S287 and step S288 is performed. Can be skipped. Following this, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “0” (step S289).

  As the second special symbol process in step S26b shown in FIG. 40, a process in which the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 50 is adapted to the second variable display device 8B may be executed. For example, the special symbol normal process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “0” is the value of the jackpot determination random number stored in the special symbol holding memory 570 together with the start winning opening data “second”. And a process for determining whether or not to start the special game by the second variable display device 8B based on the numerical data indicating the above. Further, in the special symbol normal process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “0”, when the probability variation flag is on because the probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is controlled. Then, a probability variation end determination process for determining whether to end the probability variation state and shift to the time reduction state is executed. Further, in the special symbol normal process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “0”, whether the variable display result in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B is a big hit symbol or lost? A big hit / probability change determination process is executed to determine whether or not a big hit is a probability change big hit or a normal big hit.

  The variable display start process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “1” is a fixed symbol that is stopped and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B. It includes a process of setting, a process of determining a variable symbol display time of a special symbol in the special game by the second variable display device 8B, and the like. In addition, in the variable display start process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “1”, the special game state is terminated and the normal game state when the probability changing flag and the hour / short flag are on. A special game state end determination process for determining whether or not to proceed to is executed. The variable display control process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “2” is based on the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B provided corresponding to the second variable display device 8B. In addition, the second variable display device 8B includes processing for measuring the remaining variable display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game.

  The variable display stop process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “3” is a second variable display end command indicating that the variable display of the special symbol by the second variable display device 8B is ended. In addition, processing for performing settings for transmission to the effect control board 80 is included. Further, in the variable display stop process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “3”, when the first variable display time timer is not 0 when the second big hit flag is on, Set to send variable display progress stop command and set variable display progress stop flag. The special winning opening opening pre-processing executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “4” includes initialization processing in the big hit operation such as opening / closing the opening / closing plate in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B. Contains. The special winning opening opening process that is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “5” includes various processes related to the big hit operation such as opening and closing the opening / closing plate in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B. And a process of checking the opening time per time in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B. The big hit end process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “6” determines whether or not the big hit operation by the second special variable winning ball apparatus 13B is finished. On the other hand, it includes processing for transmitting a jackpot end command for instructing the end of jackpot. Also, in the big hit end process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “6”, the variable display count initial value in the special game is set to the variable display count counter when the second probability change confirmation flag is on. In addition to setting, a setting is made to transmit a variable display progress restart command when the variable display progress stop flag is on.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display control process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “2”. When the variable display control process shown in FIG. 58 is started, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the variable display progress stop flag is on (step S331). When the variable display progress stop flag is off (step S331; No), the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B is decremented by 1 to update the timer value (step S332). Then, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the updated second variable display time timer 122B has become “0” (step S333). When the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B becomes “0” (step S333; Yes), the value of the second special symbol process flag is “3” corresponding to the variable display stop time process. (Step S334). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S333 that the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B is other than “0” (step S333; No), the process ends.

  Further, when the variable display progress stop flag is on in step S331 (step S331; Yes), a setting for controlling the display operation is performed in order to continue the variable display of the special symbol in the second variable display device 8B ( Step S335). Thereby, when the variable display progress stop flag is on, the measurement of the elapsed time since the variable display of the special symbol is started in the second variable display device 8B is interrupted, and the special diagram by the second variable display device 8B is displayed. Progress of variable display of special symbols in the game is interrupted. However, the special symbol variable display operation in the second variable display device 8B may be continuously performed without being stopped. Alternatively, when the variable display progress stop flag is on in step S331, for example, by executing a predetermined process different from the process in step S335, the second variable display device 8B loses other than the big hit symbol. The symbols may be stopped and displayed. Alternatively, when the variable display progress stop flag is on in step S331, any special symbol may be blinked on the second variable display device 8B.

  Although not shown, the special symbol in the first variable display device 8A is also displayed when the variable display progress stop flag is on even in the variable display control process executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In order to continue the variable display, setting for controlling the display operation (first variable display device special symbol operation setting) is performed. Thereby, when the variable display progress stop flag is on, the measurement of the elapsed time since the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first variable display device 8A is interrupted, and the special game by the first variable display device 8A is interrupted. The progress of variable display of special symbols in is interrupted. However, the special symbol variable display operation in the first variable display device 8A may be continuously executed without being stopped. Alternatively, when the variable display progress stop flag is on, a predetermined process that is different from the first variable display device special symbol operation setting is executed, for example, so that the first variable display device 8A loses other than the big hit symbol. The symbols may be stopped and displayed. Alternatively, when the variable display progress stop flag is on, any special symbol may be blinked and displayed on the first variable display device 8A.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S161) and a prize ball control process (step S162). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 are output to port 0 (step S163). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a predetermined prize ball number table is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set in the head address of the winning ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer, and each switch of the winning opening that will pay out the winning ball by winning. The switch input bit determination value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 33). The upper address of the switch-on buffer is a fixed value (for example, 7F (H)). In the prize ball number table, the same data is set in each of the lower addresses of the seven switch-on buffers.

  Next, the game store information screen and the player information screen displayed on the third variable display device 8C will be described with respect to the characteristic part of the present invention. The game store information screen is displayed when the third variable display device 8C enters the normal gaming state in which the decorative symbols can be variably displayed after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, at startup. This is an image for displaying various types of information for managers such as store staff of a game store (game room) in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The player information screen is an image that can be displayed in the normal gaming state in which the third variable display device 8C can variably display decorative symbols, and is an image that displays various types of information with the player as the user. is there.

  The game store information screen includes a game store menu screen, a history data clear screen, and an option screen. The history data clear screen is a screen that enables an operation (initialization operation) for initializing (deleting data) history data indicating the history of games played in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Here, the history data is collected by the effect control microcomputer 118, stored in the RAM backup area of the effect control microcomputer 118, and provided for displaying game history information as described later. This history data can continue to be used at the time of recovery after a power failure. Further, the option screen can manage whether or not to display each of a plurality of types of game histories displayed using history data when the player menu screen is displayed (display / non-display). This is a possible screen. The game shop menu screen is a screen that displays the items described above that can be executed on the game shop information screen in a menu format.

  As the game store information screen, first, a game store menu screen is displayed, and either the history data clear screen or the option screen is selected from the game store menu screen in accordance with the selection operation and determination operation by the operation key 190. Move to the display.

  FIG. 60 is a display screen diagram showing a game shop menu screen displayed on the third variable display device 8C. As shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 60, on the game shop menu screen, a message display section 440 for displaying a message related to the game shop menu screen is displayed, and an operation including an image of a button icon. As the buttons, a history data clear button 441, an option button 442, and a return button 443 are displayed. On the amusement shop menu screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the game shop menu screen, the history data clear button 441 is displayed in a frame. On the menu screen for the amusement store, the button selected by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193 on the operation key 190 as shown in FIG. The display that surrounds the frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  In the message display unit 440, a message indicating that it becomes possible when the selected button is operated is displayed. For example, when the history data clear button 441 is selected, a message “Clear history data corresponding to the number of jackpots” is displayed as shown in FIG. When the option button 442 is selected, as shown in (b), a message “You can select items to be browsed and displayed to the player” is displayed. When the return button 443 is selected, a message “return to gaming state” is displayed as shown in (c). As a result, the operator can easily grasp the function of each button.

  When the enter key 191 is operated with the history data clear button 441 selected as shown in FIG. 60A, the display of the third variable display device 8C is shown in FIG. 61A described later. Move to the history data clear screen. When the enter key 191 is operated with the option button 442 selected as shown in FIG. 60B, the display on the third variable display device 8C is displayed as an option shown in FIG. Move to the screen. When the enter key 191 is operated with the return button 443 selected as shown in FIG. 60C, the display of the third variable display device 8C is in the normal gaming state (execution of variable display of decorative symbols). To the display screen (normal game screen).

  FIG. 61 is a display screen diagram showing a history data clear screen and an option screen displayed on the third variable display device 8C. In FIG. 61, (a) and (b) show a history data clear screen, and (c) shows an option screen. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), on the history data clear screen, a message display section 444 for displaying a message relating to initialization of history data is displayed, and a Yes button is used as an operation button made up of a button icon image. 445 and No button 446 are displayed.

  On the history data clear screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. In the display start stage of the option screen, a display in which the Yes button 445 is surrounded by a frame is performed. On the option screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button with a frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed. At the stage of shifting to the history data clear screen, a message “history data will be cleared” is displayed on the message display unit 444. Then, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193 with the operation key 190, a display surrounding the selected button with a frame is performed. This indicates which button is selected. If the OK key 191 is operated with the Yes button 445 selected, the history data stored in the RAM in the backup is initialized (cleared), and a message is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (b). By displaying the message “cleared” on the display unit 444, it is notified that the history data has been initialized, and thereafter, the screen returns to the amusement shop menu screen shown in FIG. Operation of the enter key 191 in such a situation is referred to as an initialization operation. Note that, after it is notified that the history data has been initialized, the third variable display device 8C may be controlled to shift to the normal game screen.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (c), on the option screen, as the operation buttons made up of button icon images, the jackpot information management button 448, the presentation introduction management button 449, the jackpot probability management button 450, and the slump graph management. A button 451 is displayed and a return button 452 is displayed. The jackpot information is the jackpot information such as the number of variable display of special symbols executed while the jackpot gaming state occurs. Production introduction is information that introduces variable display production such as jackpot notice and reach. Here, the advance notice means that the big hit gaming state occurs, and includes a notice when the big hit gaming state actually occurs and a notice when the big hit gaming state does not actually occur. Reach means that special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for symbols that have not been stopped when the symbols that have been stopped constitute part of the jackpot symbol, and all or A state in which some symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol. The jackpot probability is information indicating the probability that a jackpot gaming state will occur. The slump graph is information indicating the number of difference balls according to the time transition in a graph format. The difference ball number is the difference between the prize ball paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball supplied to the hitting ball launcher 93.

  On the option screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the option screen, a display that surrounds the jackpot information management button 448 with a frame is performed. On the option screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button with a frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  Each of the jackpot information management button 448, the presentation introduction management button 449, the jackpot probability management button 450, and the slump graph management button 451 is referred to as “ON” indicating that it is displayed every time the determination key 191 is operated. Either the character or the character “OFF” indicating that it is not displayed is displayed. With respect to the selected button, each time the enter key 191 is operated, the characters “ON” indicating that they are displayed and the characters “OFF” indicating that they are not displayed are alternately displayed. The For each button, when the character “ON” is displayed, the game history information indicated by the button is set to be displayed. When the character “OFF” is displayed, the game history indicated by the button is displayed. Settings are made so that information cannot be displayed. If the enter key 191 is operated with the return button 452 selected, the screen returns to the amusement shop menu screen shown in FIG.

  Next, the player information screen will be specifically described. The player information screen includes a player menu screen, a jackpot information screen, an effect introduction screen, a jackpot probability screen, and a slump graph screen. The jackpot information screen is a screen that displays the jackpot information described above. The effect introduction screen is a screen for displaying the effect introduction described above. The jackpot probability screen is a screen that displays information on the jackpot probability described above. The slump graph screen is a screen that displays information on the slump graph described above. In the player information screen, the condition that the variable display of the first variable display device 8A and the third variable display device 8C is not performed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) is established, and the player information screen is displayed. Display is possible when an operation for displaying is performed.

  As the player information screen, first, a player menu screen is displayed, and in response to a selection operation and a determination operation using the operation keys 190, a bonus game information screen, an effect introduction screen, a jackpot are displayed from the game store menu screen. The display shifts from either the probability or the slump graph.

  FIG. 62 is a display screen diagram showing a player menu screen displayed on the third variable display device 8C. When the condition that the variable display of the first variable display device 8A and the third variable display device 8C is not performed for a predetermined period (20 seconds) is established, the decorative symbol 46 is displayed as shown in FIG. On this screen, an effective button 453 that enables the display of the player information screen is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. The valid button 453 is an operation button including a button icon image. The screen on which such an effective button 453 is displayed corresponds to an operation screen on which the operation of the operation key 190 is enabled. When the enter key 191 is operated with the valid button 453 selected as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the display of the third variable display device 8C displays the decorative design 46 as shown in FIG. 62 (a). The displayed screen shifts to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  On the player menu screen, a message display unit 454 for displaying a message related to the player menu screen is displayed, and as the operation buttons composed of button icon images, a big hit information button 455, an effect introduction button 456, a big hit A probability button 457, a slump graph button 458, and a return button 459 are displayed. On the player menu screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the player menu screen, a display that surrounds the jackpot information button 455 with a frame is performed. On the player menu screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button in the frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  Further, in the message display unit 454, a message indicating that it becomes possible when the selected button is operated is displayed. For example, when the jackpot information button 455 is selected, as shown in (a), a message “A jackpot symbol and the number of fluctuations are displayed.” Is displayed. As a result, the operator can easily grasp the function of each button.

  When the enter key 191 is operated with the jackpot information button 455 selected as shown in FIG. 62A, the display of the third variable display device 8C is shown in FIG. 63A described later. Move to the jackpot information screen. Further, when the enter key 191 is operated while the effect introduction button 456 is selected, the display of the third variable display device 8C shifts to an effect introduction screen shown in FIG. When the determination key 191 is operated with the big hit probability button 457 selected, the display of the third variable display device 8C shifts to the big hit probability screen shown in FIG. When the enter key 191 is operated with the slump graph button 458 selected, the display of the third variable display device 8C shifts to a slump graph screen shown in FIG.

  FIG. 63 is a display screen diagram showing a jackpot information screen, an effect introduction screen, and a jackpot probability screen displayed on the third variable display device 8C. In FIG. 63, (a) shows a big hit information screen, (b) shows an effect introduction screen, and (c) shows a big hit probability screen.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), on the jackpot information screen, every time a jackpot gaming state occurs, the jackpot derived and displayed as a variable display result on the third variable display device 8C or the fourth variable display device 8D. The first variable display device 8A and the second variable display during the symbol and the big hit gaming state (when the first big hit gaming state after turning on the power, until the first big hit gaming state occurs after turning on the power) The number of times that variable display on the display device 8B has been performed (the number of variable display times of big hits) is associated, and the big hit information table 460 shown according to the order of occurrence of the big hit gaming state is displayed. The big hit symbol is further displayed with a return button 461 on the big hit information screen. On the big hit information screen, the return button 461 is always surrounded by a frame, and when the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  As shown in (b) of FIG. 63, a notice button 462, an A-reach button 463, a B-reach button 464, an appearance character 465, and a return button 466 are operation buttons made up of button icon images on the effect introduction screen. Is displayed. Here, A reach is a specific reach among a plurality of types of predetermined reach, and B reach is a predetermined reach other than A reach. The appearance character is a character that appears (displays) in the variable display on the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D. On the effect display player menu screen, the selected button is displayed in a frame. This indicates which button is selected. At the display start stage of the player menu screen, a display that surrounds the jackpot information button 455 with a frame is performed. On the player menu screen, by operating the up direction key 192 and the down direction key 193, the display surrounding the selected button in the frame moves up and down. As a result, the selected button can be changed.

  When the enter key 191 is operated while the notice button 462 is selected, an image introducing the effect display when the big hit notice is performed is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. When the enter key 191 is operated in a state where the A reach button 463 is selected, an image introducing the effect display in the A reach is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. When the enter key 191 is operated in a state where the B reach button 464 is selected, an image introducing an effect display in the B reach is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. When the enter key 191 is operated with the appearance character 465 selected, an image introducing the appearance character is displayed on the third variable display device 8C. When the enter key 191 is operated with the return button 461 selected, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (c), in the jackpot probability screen, a jackpot probability table 467 that shows the design value of the jackpot occurrence probability for the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the measured value of the jackpot occurrence probability in a table format. And a return button 468 are displayed. Here, the actual value of the occurrence probability of the jackpot is calculated by counting the number of variable displays executed until the jackpot is generated by the production control microcomputer 118 each time a variable display pattern command is received. This is obtained by calculating the inverse of the counted number of variable displays by calculation when a variable display pattern command having the result as a combination of jackpot symbols is received, and is stored in the RAM and the probability of jackpot occurrence Used for actual measurements of. On the big hit probability screen, the return button 468 is always surrounded by a frame, and when the enter key 191 is operated, the screen returns to the player menu screen shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64 is a display screen diagram showing a slump graph screen displayed on the third variable display device 8C. As shown in FIG. 64, in the slump graph screen, the vertical axis indicates the number of balls (the number of prize balls—the number supplied to the hitting ball launcher) and the horizontal axis indicates the elapsed time. A slump graph 469 indicating the transition is displayed, and a return button 470 is displayed. Here, the difference ball number used in the slump graph 469 is calculated by the effect control microcomputer 118 counting the number of prize balls based on the received first to third payout number commands, and from the launch ball sensor 194. Based on the detected signal, the number supplied to the hitting ball launching device 93 is counted, and the effect of calculating the number of difference balls by subtracting the count value of the supplied ball number from the count value of the award ball number at predetermined time intervals And is stored in the RAM and used to display the slump graph.

  In the above-described example, the game store information screen and the player information screen shown in FIGS. 60 to 64 are displayed on the third variable display device 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display may be configured to be displayed on the display device 8D, or may be displayed across the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 118 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 118. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the effect control microcomputer 118 starts main processing. In the effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 118 first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like. This is performed (step S601). However, since the history data described above can be initialized when the game store information screen is displayed as described above, the initialization is not executed at this stage.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery command transmitted in step S94 is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (step S602). If a recovery command has been received, the process proceeds to step S606 described below. On the other hand, when the recovery command is not received, the command determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S603). Here, the command determination counter is a time measuring means for counting an elapsed time from when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when the production control microcomputer 118 receives the reset signal. Is set to a count value corresponding to a predetermined time at the time of executing the initialization process, and is counted down each time step S603 is executed. The predetermined time set as the time measured by the command determination counter is set to, for example, the longest time that the recovery command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 118 does not receive the recovery command before the time measured by the command determination counter ends, it is determined that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process instead of the recovery process. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the command determination counter is “0” (step S604). That is, in step S604, it is determined whether or not a time during which a recovery command may be transmitted has elapsed. When the value of the command determination counter is not “0”, the process returns to step S602, and the above-described processing is repeatedly executed. As described above, the recovery command input determination process for determining whether or not the recovery command is input within a predetermined time from when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by steps S602 to S604.

  When a recovery command is received while the recovery command input determination process is being performed, a game history recovery process that enables display of the game history based on the history data stored in a backup as described above is performed (step S606). ). On the other hand, when the recovery command is not received while the recovery command input determination processing is being performed and it is determined that the command determination counter has become “0”, the above-described game shop information screen is displayed and stored as a backup. Initialization data management processing that enables the history data to be initialized is executed (step S605). Details of the initialization data management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, when the recovery command is not received, that is, when the initialization process is executed in the game control microcomputer 560, the initialization data management process is executed. Even when the game history recovery process is executed, the initialization data management process may be executed. Also, when there is a predetermined operation input, for example, when a predetermined operation signal (for example, an operation signal for the operation key 190) is input before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of power supply to the gaming machine. Only the initialization data management process may be executed.

  When the game history recovery process or the initialization data management process ends, the effect control microcomputer 118 monitors the timer interrupt flag (step S607). When a timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 118 sets “1” as the value of the timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. In the timer interrupt process, if “1” is set as the value of the timer interrupt flag, the effect control microcomputer 118 clears the value of the timer interrupt flag (step S608), and performs the following effect control process. Execute.

  A timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms, for example. That is, the effect control process is activated, for example, every 2 ms. Further, in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment, only the process of setting “1” as the value of the timer interrupt flag is performed, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process. The effect control process may be executed.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 118 first clears the timer interrupt flag and executes a power-off process for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output (step S609). In the power-off process, data for returning the history data to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped is stored in the RAM. Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, if the power is restored within a predetermined period, the history data can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped. Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes command analysis processing for analyzing the received effect control command (step S610). Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs the first effect control process (step S611) and the second effect control process (step S612). The contents of the first effect control process (step S611) and the second effect control process (step S612) will be described later. In the first effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the third variable display device 8C is executed. In the second effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the fourth variable display device 8D is executed. To do.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 inputs operation signals from the operation keys 190 including the enter key 191, the up direction key 192, and the down direction key 193 via the input port 669, and further, the input / output port 671. A data input process for inputting a response signal (lamp control response signal, voice control response signal, etc.) from the above-described voice frame lamp control microcomputer 70a is executed (step S613). In the present embodiment, the peripheral command relay board 108 installed on the signal path between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80 is provided with a unidirectional circuit 108a. Therefore, a signal from the effect control board 80, a signal input to the effect control board 80 (an operation signal from the operation key 190 and a detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194), and a voice frame lamp connected to the effect control board 80 A signal from the board 70 (a board not connected to the main board 31 is a peripheral board or the like) is not transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 due to the presence of the peripheral command relay board 108. Therefore, the signal input path from the outside to the game control microcomputer 560 is limited, and the possibility of an illegal act of sending an illegal signal to the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 collects game data necessary to display the game history information as described above, and creates game data that indicates the game history and stores it in the RAM. A collection process is executed (step S614). The contents of the game data collection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes a random number update process for updating the random number counter (step S615). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S607. An INT signal for effect control from the main board 31 is input to the interrupt terminal of the microcomputer 118 for effect control. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, a timer interrupt is generated in the production control microcomputer 118. Then, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes effect control command reception processing in the interrupt processing. In the effect control command reception process, the effect control microcomputer 118 stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the initialization data management processing in step S605 of FIG. The effect control microcomputer 118 executes initialization data management processing as follows.

  First, a game shop menu screen as shown in FIG. 60A is displayed (step S621). Then, the history data initialization operation is validated, that is, the history data initialization operation is made executable (step S621a). For example, in step S621a, the initialization operation validation flag indicating that the history data initialization operation is permitted is turned on, and the history data in the RAM is initialized when the initialization operation validation flag is not on. The program is controlled so that it does not start. Next, it is determined whether any one of the history data clear button 441, the option button 442, and the return button 443 has been operated (step S622). Such a determination is repeatedly performed until the operation button is operated. If it is determined that any one of the operation buttons has been operated, data processing and image display corresponding to the operation of the operation button are executed (step S623). That is, according to the operation of the operation button, for example, data processing such as initialization of history data, setting of display / non-display of game history information, and setting of data necessary for image display is executed. At the same time, various images as described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 are displayed. In the state in which steps S622 and S623 are executed, the history data initialization operation is validated. Therefore, when the history data initialization operation is performed, a program for initializing the history data in the RAM is executed. Thus, the history data in the RAM is initialized.

  Next, in the operation of the operation button determined in step S622, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of the return button 443 on the game shop menu screen, that is, an end operation of the game shop menu screen (step S624). . When it is determined that there is no end operation, the process returns to step S622, and the above-described processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end operation has been performed, the history data initialization operation is invalidated, that is, the history data initialization operation is disabled (step S625). For example, in step S625, the initialization operation validation flag is turned OFF, and control is performed so that the program for initializing the history data in the RAM is not started in the subsequent processing. Although not shown here, the initialization operation validation flag is also turned off when the initialization data management process ends when any of the operation buttons is not operated for a predetermined period as described above. Then, the initialization data management process ends, and the process returns. In the initialization data management process, it is possible to determine whether or not an effect control command indicating that there has been a winning such as a variable display pattern command has been received. The initialization operation validation flag may be turned off to end the initialization data management process.

  If any of the operation buttons is not operated for a predetermined period in step S622, the initialization data management process may be terminated. If an effect control command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 during processing other than step S623, the initialization data management process may be terminated. With this configuration, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 118 can be synchronized.

  Such initialization data management processing is processing that can initialize history data. As described above, the initialization data management process is executed when the recovery command is not transmitted within a predetermined period, that is, when the initialization process is executed by the game control microcomputer 560. . In other words, the initialization data management process is executed on the condition that the initialization process is executed in response to the operation of the clear switch 921 by an administrator such as a game shop clerk when the power is turned on. It becomes. For this reason, the initialization of the history data that can be performed in the initialization data management process is performed by the clear switch 921 existing on the rear surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that cannot be easily operated by the player during a normal game. This is a prerequisite. For this reason, it is prevented that a player initializes game history data without permission.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in step S610 of FIG. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer are confirmed.

  In the command analysis process, first, it is confirmed whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S631). When it is determined that the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the received command is read from the command receiving buffer (step S632).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the received effect control command is the first variable display pattern command (step S633a). When it is determined that the received command is the first variable display pattern command, the data of the first variable display pattern command is stored in the first variable display pattern data storage area in the RAM mounted on the effect control board 80. (Step S633b). Then, a process of setting the first variable display pattern command reception flag indicating that the first variable display pattern command has been received to ON is performed (step S633c). Then, the process returns to step S631.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a variable display pattern command, it is determined whether or not the received effect control command is a second variable display pattern command (step S634a). When it is determined that the received command is the second variable display pattern command, the data of the second variable display pattern command is stored in the second variable display pattern data storage area in the RAM mounted on the effect control board 80. (Step S634b). Then, a process of setting the second variable display pattern command reception flag indicating that the second variable display pattern command has been received to ON is performed (step S634c). Then, the process returns to step S631.

  If it is determined that the received command is not the first variable display pattern command or the second variable display pattern command, it is determined whether the received command is the first demonstration display command (step S636a). When it is determined that the received command is the first demonstration display command, a process of turning on a first demonstration display command reception flag indicating that the first demonstration display command has been received is performed (step S636b). Then, the process returns to step S631.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not the first demonstration display command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the second demonstration display command (step S637a). When it is determined that the received command is the second demonstration display command, a process of turning on a second demonstration display command reception flag indicating that the second demonstration display command has been received is performed (step S637b). Then, the process returns to step S631.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a demonstration display command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout number command (first to third payout number commands) (step S638). Specifically, it is determined whether or not each of the first to third payout number commands has been received. When it is determined that the individually received command is a payout number command, the payout number command reception command flag corresponding to the type of payout number command received (any one of the first to third types) is turned ON. (Step S639). Then, the process returns to step S631. For example, when the first payout number command is received, the first payout number command reception flag is turned ON. When the second payout number command is received, the second payout number command reception flag is turned ON, and the third payout number command is set. When the command is received, the third payout number command reception flag is turned ON. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer can recognize that four prize balls are paid out when the first payout number command reception flag is turned on, and the second payout number command reception flag is turned on. It is possible to recognize that 7 prize balls are paid out when the third payout command is received, and it is possible to recognize that 15 prize balls are paid out when the third payout number command reception flag is turned ON.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a payout number command (first to third payout number commands), whether or not each of the effect control commands that may be received in addition to the above-described commands has been received. And the command reception flag corresponding to the received command is turned ON (step S640). Then, the process returns to step S631.

  For example, based on the reception of the start command (command indicating start of the probability variation state) described above, the flag in the probability variation state is set, and the time reduction start command (terminates the probability variation state and starts the time reduction state) The probability variation state flag is reset based on the reception of a command indicating that the time reduction state is received, and the time reduction state flag is set. In addition, the probability change state flag and the time reduction state flag are reset based on the reception of the end command (command indicating that the probability change state and the time reduction state are ended), and the recovery command described above is received. Set the recovery flag accordingly. When the effect control microcomputer 118 determines that the probability variation state flag is set in the symbol variable display start process of the first effect control process (step S611) and the second effect control process (step S612). In addition, the player is notified by displaying on the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D that the control is in the probability variation state (for example, during the probability variation), and the first effect control process (step S611). When it is determined that the time reduction state flag is set in the symbol variable display start process of the second effect control process (step S612), the fact that the time reduction state is controlled (for example, the time is short) 3. The player is notified by displaying on the fourth variable display devices 8C, 8D. When it is determined in the symbol variable display start process of the first effect control process (step S611) and the second effect control process (step S612) that the probability variation state flag and the time shortening state flag are reset. End the display.

  Note that the display indicating that the control is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be executed only in either the third variable display device 8C or the fourth variable display device 8D. In addition, one or both of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B display that the control is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (for example, the first special symbol process process). (Step S26a) and the special symbol display control process (step S26a) when it is determined that one or both of the variable display start process of the second special symbol process process (step S26b) is set to the probability variation flag or the hourly flag Corresponding to the first variable display device 8A and the second special symbol process (step S26b) corresponding to the variable display start process of the variable display device (for example, the first special symbol process (step S26a)) in S33). To the second variable display device 8B) that controls the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is set by outputting a drive signal. And has the effect (e.g., in probability variation), indicating that controls the time saving state when the time reduction flag is set (e.g., in time reduction), may be displayed to) as the. In other words, any of the first to fourth variable display devices 8A to 8D or any combination of the variable display devices may be displayed to indicate that the probability variation state or the time reduction state is controlled. The recovery flag is used to determine whether or not a recovery command has been received in step S602 described above, and is reset in step S606 or step S605. In addition, detailed description of processing for each of the presentation control commands that may be received in addition to the commands described above is omitted here.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the first effect control process according to step S611 in FIG. In the first effect control process, one of steps S731 to S738 is executed according to the value of the first effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variable display pattern command reception waiting process (step S731): It is confirmed whether or not the first variable display pattern command is received, and when it is confirmed that the first variable display pattern command is received, the first effect control process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to step S734. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the first variable display pattern command has been received, the value of the first effect control process flag is set to a value according to step S732 according to the establishment of the condition for executing the game information display process. In addition, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S732 in accordance with the establishment of the condition for executing the demonstration display. The contents of the variable display pattern command reception waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Demo display process (step S732): The first variable display device 8C executes the demo display, and the first variable is displayed in accordance with the establishment of a condition for ending the demo display (such as receiving the first variable display pattern command). The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S734.

  Game information display processing (step S733): The player menu screen is executed, game history information and the like are displayed according to the operation, and the value of the first effect control process flag is set according to step S731 according to the end operation. Update to value. Further, in response to receiving the first variable display pattern command, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S734. The contents of the game information display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Symbol variable display start processing (step S734): A combination of a variable display pattern and a decorative symbol stop symbol to be actually used is determined from a plurality of variable symbol display patterns determined according to the first variable display pattern command. To do. Also. The variation of the decorative symbol (left middle right symbol) in the third variable display device 8C is started. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S735.

  Symbol variable display processing (step S735): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed, etc.) constituting the variable display pattern, and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. In addition, stop control of the left and right symbols is performed. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S736.

  Symbol stop waiting process (step S736): When the variation time specified by the first variable display pattern command has elapsed, an effect control command (first variable display end command) for instructing stop of all symbols of the decorative symbol has been received. Then, control is performed to stop the variation of the decorative symbol and display the stopped symbol (deterministic symbol). Thereafter, when the stop symbol is a combination of jackpot symbols, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S737, and when the stop symbol is a combination of outlier symbols, the first effect control process The value of the flag is updated to a value according to step S731.

  Big hit display process (step S737): After the end of the variation time, the control of the probability variable big hit display or the normal big hit display is performed. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S738.

  Big hit game processing (step S738): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when an effect control command for display before opening the big winning opening or display when opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. Thereafter, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S731.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing variable display pattern command reception waiting processing that is executed when the value of the first effect control process flag is “0”. In the variable display pattern command reception waiting process, it is determined whether or not the first variable display pattern command reception flag is ON (step S741). When it is determined that the first variable display pattern command reception flag is ON, the first variable display pattern command reception flag is turned OFF (step S742). Next, the value of the non-change time counter is cleared (initialized) to “0” (step S743). Here, the non-variable time counter is a time measuring means for measuring the time during which the decorative symbols are not variably displayed on the third variable display device 8C, that is, the non-variable time. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variable display start process (step S744).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S741 that the first variable display pattern command reception flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the first demonstration display command reception flag is ON (step S745). When it is determined that the first demonstration display command reception flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the value of the non-variable time counter described above is a predetermined set value (a value corresponding to 20 seconds). (Step S746). When it is determined that the value of the non-variable time counter is not the set value, the value of the non-variable time counter is added and updated by “1” (step S747), and the process returns. Thereby, while the value of the non-variable time counter is not the set value, the value of the non-variable time counter is updated each time the variable display pattern command reception waiting process is executed. As described above, the non-variable time counter is cleared in response to receiving the first variable display pattern command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the non-change time counter is the set value, it is determined whether or not the image of the valid button 453 as shown in FIG. S748).

  If it is determined that the image of the valid button 453 is not being displayed, the image of the valid button 453 is displayed (step S749), and it is determined whether or not the enter key 191 has been operated (step S750). On the other hand, when it is determined that the image of the valid button 453 is not being displayed, since the image of the valid button 453 has already been displayed, it is determined whether or not the enter button has been operated (step S750). If it is determined that the OK button has not been operated, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination button has been operated, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the game information display process in step S732 (step S751), and the process returns. Thereby, it shifts to a game information display process in the next first production control process. As described above, the operation key 190 is activated when the non-variable time reaches the predetermined time, that is, on the condition that the variable display is not performed on the third variable display device 8C for the predetermined time. .

  If it is determined in step S745 that the first demonstration display command reception flag is not ON, the first demonstration display command reception flag is turned OFF (step S752), and the value of the first effect control process flag is set. The value is updated according to the demonstration display process in step S732 (step S753), and the process returns. Thereby, it shifts to a demonstration display in the next first production control process. The first demonstration display command is transmitted when variable display is not executed in the third variable display device 8C for a time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 20 seconds) when the non-variable time becomes a set value. Therefore, the above-described player menu screen is displayed prior to the demonstration display.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a game information display process executed when the value of the first effect control process flag is “2”. In the game information display process, it is determined whether or not the first variable display pattern command reception flag is ON (step S761). When it is determined that the first variable display pattern command reception flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the game information display mode flag is set to ON (step S762). Here, the game information display mode flag is a flag indicating that the game information display process is selected in the first effect control process and the player menu screen is displayed.

  When it is determined that the game information display mode flag is not turned on, a player menu screen as shown in FIG. 62B is displayed (step S764), and the game information display mode flag is turned on. Set (step S765) and return. As a result, the operation of the operation button on the player menu screen by the operation of the operation key 190 is validated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game information display mode flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the operation button is operated on the player menu screen (step S763). Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not various operation buttons shown in FIGS. 62 to 64 are operated.

  When it is determined that the operation button is not operated on the player menu screen, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button is operated on the player menu screen, data processing according to the operation button operation and image display are executed by the third variable display device 8C (step S1). S766). That is, in accordance with the operation of the operation button, data processing such as setting of data necessary for image display is executed, and various image displays as described with reference to FIGS. 3 is performed by the variable display device 8C.

  Next, in the operation button operation determined in step S766, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of the return button 459 on the player menu screen, that is, an end operation of the player menu screen (step S767). . If it is determined that there is no end operation, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending operation has been performed, the game information display mode flag is turned off (step S768). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display pattern command reception waiting process (step S769).

  When it is determined in step S761 that the first variable display pattern command reception flag is ON, the first variable display pattern command reception flag is turned OFF (step S770), and the game information display mode flag is OFF. (Step S771). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variable display start process (step S772), and the process returns. Thus, when the first variable display pattern command is received in a state where information such as game history information is displayed based on the operation after the player menu screen is displayed, the third variable display device 8C is displayed. As a result, the variable display of the decorative design is started.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the game data collection process in step S614 of FIG. In the game data collection process, it is determined whether or not a game data collection signal has been input (step S781). Here, the game data collection signal refers to a signal indicating game data to be collected in order to create history data as described above. Specifically, the game data collection signals include the first to second variable display pattern commands from the game control microcomputer 560, the first to third payout number commands, and the detection signal from the launch ball sensor 194. Is included. The first to second variable display pattern commands are used to create history data for displaying each of the aforementioned jackpot information and jackpot probability. Further, the first to third payout number commands and the detection signal of the launch ball sensor 194 are used for creating history data for displaying the aforementioned slump graph.

  If it is determined that no game data collection signal has been input, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that a game data collection signal has been input, processing for creating and updating history data based on the game data such as the input signal is performed (step S782). Specifically, history data is created and the history data is updated as follows.

  When the first to second variable display pattern commands are input, it is determined whether or not the command is a command indicating that it is a big hit. When the input first to second variable display pattern commands are commands indicating that they are out of place, the data of the variable display count that is used for displaying the big hit information is updated, and the big hit The data of the variable display frequency of outliers used for calculating the actual value of the big hit probability in the probability display is updated.

  In addition, when the input first to second variable display pattern commands are commands indicating that they are jackpots, data indicating the combination of the jackpot symbols of the decorative symbols determined by the above-described variation start processing (step S734) is present. Read from RAM. Then, the combination of the jackpot symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the history data for displaying the jackpot information for displaying the data of the variable display frequency of the lost variable updated as described above as the jackpot variable display frequency is created. Is done. Further, when the input first to second variable display pattern commands are commands indicating that the jackpot is a big hit, the data of the variable display frequency that is a jackpot used to calculate the actual value of the jackpot probability in the display of the jackpot probability Is updated. Then, based on the data and the variable display frequency data used for calculation of the actual value with the updated jackpot probability as described above, the actual value (cumulative value) of the jackpot probability is calculated. Then, history data for displaying the calculated value as an actual measurement value of the jackpot probability is created.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 is provided with a difference ball number counter for counting the number of difference balls displayed in the slump graph described above. Specifically, when the first to third payout number commands are input, the prize ball payout number indicated by the input command is added to the value of the difference ball number counter. When a detection signal from the firing ball sensor 194 is input, the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted every time the detection signal is input. Thereby, the difference ball number counter is updated every time a prize ball is paid out and every time a hit ball is fired. Thus, every time the difference ball counter is updated, history data for displaying the difference ball number in the slump graph (data relating the difference ball number and the elapsed time from the start of counting the difference ball number) is displayed. Created.

  Next, the history data created and updated in step S782 is stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 118 (step S783). Then return.

  In this embodiment, history data of the entire pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, history data obtained by adding up both the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D is created. And history data corresponding to each of the first variable display device and the fourth variable display device may be created. In this case, history data corresponding to the third variable display device 8C is created when the first variable display pattern command is received, and corresponding to the fourth variable display device 8D when the second variable display pattern command is received. By creating the history data, the history data of the jackpot variable display count and the actual value (cumulative value) of the jackpot probability corresponding to each of the third variable display device 8C and the fourth variable display device 8D is created. May be. The information created as the history data is not limited to these, and any information may be used as long as it is data generated according to a game and data obtained by processing the generated data. For example, the number of winnings in the normal winning ball device 12A and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning ball device 12B may be created as history data. In this case, the number of winnings in the normal winning ball device 12A and the normal winning ball device 12A The winning ratio to the variable winning ball device 12B, the winning ratio in the first variable display device 8A (third variable display device 8C), and the second variable display device 8B (fourth variable display device 8D). The number of occurrences of jackpot and the ratio of occurrence of jackpot may be created as history data.

  As the second effect control process in step S612 shown in FIG. 65, a process in which the first effect control process shown in FIG. 68 is adapted to the fourth variable display device 8D may be executed. For example, the production control microcomputer 118 performs processing in which each process of steps S731 to S738 except for step S733 shown in FIG. 68 is adapted to the fourth variable display device 8D according to the value of the second production control process flag. Select and execute.

  For example, in the variable display pattern command reception waiting process executed when the value of the second effect control process flag is “0”, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is started. The process etc. which determine are included. In this embodiment, the variable display pattern command reception waiting process executed when the value of the second effect control process flag is “0” does not execute the processes of steps S746 to S751 described above. Steps S746-described above in the variable display pattern command reception wait process executed when the value of the second effect control process flag is "0" when the variable display of the decorative design is being executed on the variable display device 8C. You may comprise so that the process of step S751 may be performed and a game information display process may be performed. In addition, only in the variable display pattern command reception waiting process that is executed when the value of the second effect control process flag is “0”, the process of steps S746 to S751 is executed to execute the game information display process. Also good. In this case, the variable display pattern command reception waiting process executed when the value of the first effect control process flag is “0” when the decorative display variable display is being executed on the fourth variable display device 8D. At step S746 to step S751, the game information display process may be executed.

  The symbol variable display start process executed when the value of the second effect control process flag is “1” is the first when variable symbol display of the special symbol game is started by the second variable display device 8B. In order to produce various display effects including variable display of decorative symbols by the four variable display device 8D, for example, a special symbol in the second variable display device 8B from among a plurality of types of display control table data stored in the ROM. Including a process for setting the display operation of the third variable display device 8C, such as a process for selecting the one corresponding to the variable display time.

  The variable symbol display process includes a process of controlling a display operation during variable display of decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D. The symbol stop waiting process includes a process of ending the variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth variable display device 8D in response to receiving the second variable display end command transmitted from the main board 31. The second big hit display process includes a process of displaying an image corresponding to the big hit gaming state by controlling the display operation in the fourth variable display device 8D. The display process at the time of the end of the second jackpot includes a process of controlling the effect display for notifying that the jackpot gaming state has ended at the fourth variable display device 8D.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable symbol display process in the second effect control process. When the symbol variable display process shown in FIG. 72 is started, the effect control microcomputer 118 first determines whether or not the in-progress stop flag is on (step S501). The progress stop flag is used when the progress of the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped in any of the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D in response to the variable display progress stop command from the main board 31. Is set to the on state, and in response to a variable display progress restart command from the main board 31, the progress of variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in any of the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D. Cleared and turned off. At this time, if the progress stop flag is OFF (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not a variable display progress stop command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S502). When the variable display progress stop command is received (step S502; Yes), the progress stop flag is set to the on state (step S503).

  When the progress stop flag is on in step S501 (step S501; Yes), it is determined whether or not a variable display progress restart command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S504). After executing the process of step S503 or when it is determined in step S504 that the variable display progress restart command has not been received (step S504; No), a predetermined drawing command is sent to the VDP 119, etc. Settings are made to perform control for causing the fourth variable display device 8D to display an image corresponding to the fact that the progress of the variable display of special symbols in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is interrupted (step S505). . For example, in the processing of step S505, the presentation control microcomputer 118 sends a drawing command for instructing drawing based on predetermined image data to the VDP 119, whereby the progress of variable display is interrupted to the fourth variable display device 8D. Control is performed to display an image for notifying that it is being performed. Or you may make it perform control which performs various production | presentation displays, without displaying the image for alert | reporting that the progress of the variable display of the special symbol in the 2nd variable display apparatus 8B is interrupted. In this case, the fourth variable display device 8D may be controlled to display an image for notifying that the special symbol variable display is continued in the second variable display device 8B.

  In the process of step S505, the effect control microcomputer 118 repeatedly reads the same display control data from the display control data table and sends a drawing command to the VDP 119. When the progress of the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted, the variable display operation itself of the decorative symbol in the fourth variable display device 8D may be continuously executed. Alternatively, when the production control microcomputer 118 sends a predetermined drawing command to the VDP 119, for example, information related to the production unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the type of reach and the introduction of characters, is changed to the fourth variable. You may perform control which alert | reports by the display in display apparatus 8D. Alternatively, in the big hit gaming state based on the big win game state based on the special display game by the first variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative design by the third variable display device 8C, for example, the number of rounds or the first special variable winning ball You may perform control which alert | reports the information regarding a big hit game state, such as the count number of the winning ball to apparatus 13A, by the display in 4th variable display apparatus 8D. Alternatively, when the presentation control microcomputer 118 sends a predetermined drawing command to the VDP 119, the progress of the special symbol variable display in the special game by the second variable display device 8B is interrupted. The variable display of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 8D may be stopped, and the decorative symbols that are lost combinations may be stopped and displayed.

  When the process of step S505 is thus executed, the symbol variable display process is terminated without updating the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B. Thus, for example, during the execution of the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B and the variable symbol display by the fourth variable display device 8D, the confirmed symbol is a big hit as a variable display result in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a big hit gaming state, for example, as a symbol, the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the fourth variable display device 8D is interrupted on the effect control board 80 on the sub side. Thus, the measurement of the elapsed time by the second variable display time timer 122B is interrupted.

  When it is determined in step S504 that the variable display progress restart command has been received (step S504; Yes), the progress stop flag is cleared and turned off (step S506). Then, when the variable display progress stop command is not received in step S502 (step S502; No), after executing the process of step S506, for example, 1 is subtracted from the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B. For example, the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B is updated (step S507). Following this, it is determined whether or not the second variable display time timer 122B has timed out (step S508). If timed out (step S508; Yes), the value of the second effect control process flag is awaited for symbol stop. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (step S509). On the other hand, when the second variable display time timer 122B has not timed out (step S508; No), for example, display control data corresponding to the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B is read from the display control data table and read out. Display control is set according to the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B, such as sending a drawing command according to the display control data to the VDP 119 (step S510).

  Although not shown, the above-described steps S501 to S506) are also performed in the symbol variable display process that is executed when the value of the first effect control process flag is “4”. As a result, for example, the fixed symbol is a big hit as a variable display result in the special game by the second variable display device 8B during execution of the special display game by the first variable display device 8A and the decorative display variable display by the third variable display device 8C. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a big hit gaming state, for example, as a symbol, the progress of the variable display of decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C is interrupted on the effect control board 80 on the sub side. Thus, the measurement of the elapsed time by the first variable display time timer 122A is interrupted.

  Hereinafter, a specific operation example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A is established, the special prize holding memory 570 is associated with the start winning data “first”. The value of the jackpot determination random number is read (step S235 in FIG. 51), and the jackpot / probability change determination process is executed based on the random value (step S238). Further, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is established, the value of the random number for jackpot determination associated with the start winning data “second” from the special figure holding memory 570 Is read, and the jackpot / probability determination process is executed based on the random number value.

  For example, in the jackpot / probability change determination process executed when the special game is started by the first variable display device 8A, it is determined that the jackpot determination random number matches with the determination value data, so that the jackpot / probability determination process is performed. Then (step S414 in FIG. 53; Yes), after setting the first big hit flag to the ON state (step S415), it is determined whether or not the probability change big hit is made based on the value of the random number for probability change determination (step S415). S417). When it is determined that the probability change big hit is made (step S417; Yes), the first probability change confirmation flag is set to an on state (step S418). When the special game is started by the second variable display device 8B, a process corresponding to the second variable display device 8B is executed for the big hit / probability change determination process, and it is determined that a big hit is made. The second big hit flag is set to the on state, and when it is determined that the probability big hit is made, the second probability change confirmation flag is set to the on state.

  Thereafter, when the special game by the first variable display device 8A is started, the fixed symbol in the special game by the first variable display device 8A is executed by executing the variable display start process as shown in FIG. Also, the variable display pattern is determined. At this time, if the first big hit flag is on, for example, the fourth variable display device in a period in which the special display game by the second variable display device 8B and the decorative display variable display by the fourth variable display device 8D are executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbols by 8D, a setting is made to execute a predetermined effect display that is a notice effect for notifying that the variable display result in the special game by the first variable display device 8A becomes a big hit symbol. It may be broken.

  For example, it is determined whether or not the number of stored start prize data “second” (second stored number) in the special figure holding memory 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined long-term effect execution allowable value (for example, “4”), When the long-term effect execution allowable value is exceeded, select a variable display pattern that has a variable display time that is sufficiently longer than the variable display time of special symbols in the other variable display patterns from the big-hit variable display patterns. Thus, the variable display pattern in the special display game this time by the first variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C is determined. Thereafter, when the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is started, the variable display start time process is executed in response to the value of the second special symbol process flag being “1”, whereby the fourth variable is displayed. In the variable display of the decorative design by the display device, the variable display pattern for executing the notice effect is selected, and in the special display game this time by the second variable display device 8B and the variable display of the decorative design by the fourth variable display device 8D. Determine the variable display pattern. At this time, the second variable display device 8B is selected by selecting a variable display pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B since the start of the special game by the first variable display device 8A. During a plurality of special figure games, a predetermined effect display as a notice effect may be executed by display on the fourth variable display device 8D.

  If the first big hit flag is on when the variable display start process as shown in FIG. 54 is executed, the special symbol variable display by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. Production linkage may be executed to control the production performed by the display of the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D to have a predetermined relationship with each other. For example, when starting the special game by the first variable display device 8A, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B is within a predetermined effect interlocking range. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined notice effect as the second notice effect is to be executed in the decorative symbol variable display device by the fourth variable display device 8D when it is within the effect interlockable range, Based on the variable display pattern in the special display game being executed by the two variable display device 8B and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol display by the fourth variable display device 8D, the first variable display is made to be a combination of the predetermined variable display patterns. The variable display pattern in the special display game by the device 8A and the decorative display variable display by the third variable display device 8C is determined.

  Alternatively, when the timer value of the second variable display time timer 122B is within a predetermined effect interlocking range when the special game by the first variable display device 8A is started, a combination of predetermined variable display patterns The variable display pattern in the special display game by the first variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C, the special display game being executed by the second variable display device 8B, and the fourth You may make it determine the variable display pattern after the change in the variable display of the decoration design by the variable display apparatus 8D. In this case, the main board 31 transmits to the effect control board 80 a pattern change command for instructing change of the variable display pattern in the variable display of the decorative symbols executed by the fourth variable display device 8D. On the side of the production control board 80, based on the reception of the pattern change command from the main board 31, the adjustment of the timer value in the second variable display time timer 122B and the variable display of the decorative pattern by the fourth variable display device 8D. Then, the decorative design that is derived and displayed as the confirmed symbol is changed, and the variable display of the decorative design based on the changed variable display pattern may be started.

  Further, when both the first and second big hit flags are on when the special game by the second variable display device 8B is started, the special symbol by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. During the variable display, the setting for executing the effect display as the specific notice effect may be performed by the variable display of the decorative symbols in the fourth variable display device 8D.

  For example, the first big hit flag is set to the on state based on the determination that the big win is made when starting the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A, and the first variable display device 8A The variable display pattern in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the special game and the fourth variable display device 8C is variable in reach B (big hit) by referring to the big hit variable display pattern determination table 153 shown in FIG. It is assumed that the display pattern is determined. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs variable display of the decorative pattern by the third variable display device 8C according to the variable display pattern of reach B (big hit) based on the first variable display pattern command transmitted from the main board 31. Let it begin. Thereby, for example, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 73A are accelerated and displayed, and variable display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 73C is started.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D illustrated in FIG. 73B together with the special game by the second variable display device 8B is finished, and the fourth variable display device 8D displays, for example, FIG. Following the display of the combination of decorative symbols that are normally lost as shown in 73 (D), the start condition for the next special game by the second variable display device 8B is established. At this time, if it is determined in the special game by the second variable display device 8B that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, the second big hit flag is set to the on state. Thus, based on the fact that both the first and second jackpot flags are turned on when the special variable game by the second variable display device 8B is started, for example, the special variable game of the current variable by the second variable display device 8B and The variable display pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the fourth variable display device 8D is determined as the variable display pattern of reach D (big hit).

  At this time, the effect control microcomputer 118 is based on the second variable display pattern command from the main board 31, for example, according to the variable display pattern of reach D (big hit) as shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative design by 8D is started. In the third variable display device 8C, for example, as shown in FIG. 73E, the decorative symbol indicating “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) on the left variable display section. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 118 controls the display operation in the fourth variable display device 8D in accordance with the variable display pattern of reach D (big hit), thereby variably displaying the decorative pattern by the fourth variable display device 8D. For example, an image (for example, a moving image or a character image) as shown in FIGS. 73 (H) and (J) is displayed. In this period, in the third variable display device 8C, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), a decorative symbol indicating “7” is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the right variable display, and the variable display in the middle is displayed. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached by continuously performing the variable display of the decorative symbol. And as an effect display according to the variable display pattern of reach B (big hit), for example, reach effect display as shown in FIG. 73 (I) is started on the third variable display device 8C.

  Thereafter, when the variable display time Ti24 of the special symbol in the variable display pattern of reach D (big hit) has elapsed since the start of variable display by the second and fourth variable display devices 8B, 8D, the second variable display time timer 122B In response to the time-out, the second variable display end command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the peripheral command relay board 108. Further, in the second variable display device 8B, the big hit symbol (a special symbol indicating “3” or “7”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol. In response to receiving the second variable display end command from the main board 31, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the decorative symbol on the fourth variable display device 8D at a reduced speed, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. At this time, as will be described later, the progress of the variable display of the special symbol by the first variable display device 8A and the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the third variable display device 8C as shown in FIG. 73 (K), for example. You may make it interrupt.

  Thus, when the first variable display time timer 122A times out after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B becomes the big hit symbol, the peripheral command is sent from the main board 31. A first variable display end command is transmitted to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 108. In the first variable display device 8A, the big hit symbol (a special symbol indicating “3” or “7”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol. In response to receiving the first variable display end command from the main board 31, for example, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the decorative design in the variable display section in the third variable display device 8C at a reduced speed. As shown in FIG. 73 (M), a decorative symbol indicating “7” is derived and displayed on the variable display portion in the middle. In this way, in the third variable display device 8C, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A as described above and controlled to the jackpot gaming state (first time point), the second variable display device. When the special symbol variable display is being executed in the special figure game by 8B, a variable display progress stop command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the peripheral command relay board 108 (FIG. 56). Step S275). For example, in the special game by the first variable display device 8A, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol, and the big win combination decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 74 (A) is a decorative symbol by the third variable display device. It is assumed that it is derived and displayed as a variable display result.

  In this case, the presentation control microcomputer 118 sends a predetermined drawing command to the VDP 119 in response to receiving the variable display progress stop command from the main board, for example, by the fourth variable display device 8D. The notification information 71A as shown in 74 (B) is displayed. The notification information 71A may be any information that can notify that the measurement of the elapsed time in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is interrupted while the variable display of the special symbol is continued. With this notification information 71A, the player can recognize that the measurement of the elapsed time in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B has been interrupted. In addition to the notification information 71A, the effect control microcomputer 118 sends a predetermined drawing command to the VDP 119 in response to receiving the variable display progress stop command from the main board. A character image 71C as shown in I) may be displayed on the fourth variable display device 8D. Alternatively, only one of the notification information 71A and the character image 71C may be displayed, or neither may be displayed to notify that the variable display is interrupted. In this way, when variable display is interrupted, the decorative symbol that is the combination of the loss may be stopped and displayed.

  Thus, at the first time point when the big hit gaming state is controlled, the variable display progress stop flag is set to the on state (step S276 in FIG. 56), so that the process in step S332 shown in FIG. 58 is not executed. (Step S331 in FIG. 58; Yes), measurement of the elapsed time since the special symbol variable display is started in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B is interrupted. Also, on the side of the effect control board 80, in response to receiving the variable display progress stop command, the progress stop flag is set to the on state (step S503 in FIG. 72), and the process of step S507 is executed. As a result, the measurement of the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design by the fourth variable display device 8D is interrupted.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 mounted on the main board 31 performs a setting for transmitting a predetermined big hit round number instruction command to the effect control board 80 in the large winning opening opening process of step S115 shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 74C, information for notifying the number of executions of the round executed in the big hit gaming state is displayed in the display area of the third variable display device 8C. At this time, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the fourth variable display device 8D continues to execute the variable display of decorative symbols as in FIG. 74 (B). It should be interrupted.

  When the big hit gaming state ends, a big hit end command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S281 in FIG. 57). In response to the jackpot end command, information for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is ended is displayed in the display area of the third variable display device 8C, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (E). Thus, when the big hit gaming state ends (second time point), the variable display progress stop flag is cleared and turned off (step S288 in FIG. 57), so that the process in step S332 shown in FIG. 58 is executed. (Step S331 in FIG. 58; No), the measurement of the elapsed time after the variable display of the special symbol is started in the special game by the second variable display device 8B is resumed. At this time, a variable display progress restart command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the peripheral command relay board 108 (step S287 in FIG. 57). On the side of the effect control board 80, in response to receiving the variable display progress restart command, the progress stop flag is cleared and turned off (step S506 in FIG. 72), so that the process of step S507 is executed. In other words, the measurement of the elapsed time from the start of variable display of decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D is resumed.

  When restarting the measurement of the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design by the fourth variable display device 8D, for example, the production control microcomputer 118 sends a predetermined drawing command to the VDP 119, for example, FIG. The notification information 71B as shown in (H) may be displayed on the fourth variable display device 8D. With this notification information 71B, the player can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B has been resumed.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B and controlled to the big hit gaming state, the special symbol is given by the special variable game by the first variable display device 8A. When the variable display is being executed, the progress of the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game being executed by the first variable display device 8A and the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the fourth variable display device 8D are: You may make it interrupt. In this case, as the variable display stop process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “3”, the variable display stop process shown in FIG. 56 is adapted to the second variable display device 8B. As the jackpot end process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “6”, a process in which the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 57 is adapted to the second variable display device 8B is performed. Just do it. In addition, in the variable display control process (step S112 in FIG. 50) executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”, the variable display control process shown in FIG. 58 is applied to the first variable display device 8A. Perform the adapted process. Further, on the side of the production control board 80, the production control microcomputer 118 performs the variable symbol display process (step S735 in FIG. 68) executed when the value of the first production control process flag is “2”. A process in which the process during variable symbol display shown in FIG. 72 is adapted to the third variable display device 8C is executed.

  When the big hit gaming state is ended based on the fact that the variable display result is the probability change big hit in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A, the first probability change confirmation flag is on (step S283 in FIG. 57; Yes), the probability changing flag is set to the ON state (step S284), and the count value of the variable display number counter 123 is set to the initial value of the variable display number during special game (step S285). When the big hit gaming state is completed based on the fact that the variable display result is a probable big hit in the special game by the second variable display device 8B, the second probable change confirmation flag is on, so the probable changing flag is on. And the count value of the variable display count counter 123 is set to the initial value of the variable display count during the special game.

  When the special game is started by the first variable display device 8A after the probability variation flag is set to the ON state in this way, the probability variation end state processing is executed by executing the probability variation end determination process in step S237 shown in FIG. It is then determined whether or not to shift to a time reduction state (step S403 in FIG. 52). Also, when the special game by the second variable display device 8B is started, the probability variation end determination process similar to step S237 shown in FIG. 51 is executed to shift from the probability variation state to the time reduction state. It may be determined whether or not. When it is determined that the probability variation state by the probability variation control is to be ended (step S403 in FIG. 52; Yes), the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off, while the time-shortage flag is set to the on state. (Step S404). When the probability change flag is on, the increase determination value data is set as the determination value data in the big hit / probability change determination process shown in FIG. 53 (step S412). The probability that it is determined to be a symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, when the probability changing flag is on (step S254 in FIG. 54; Yes) or when the hour / short flag is on (step S255; Yes), the special variable display pattern determination table shown in FIG. By determining the variable display pattern with reference to 151, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special game is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Then, by executing the special game state end determination process in step S260 shown in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time reduction state is to be ended. Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbol is started in the special figure game, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time shortening state, and when it is determined to end, Clearing the probability change flag (step S434 in FIG. 55) and clearing the short time flag (step S435), an end command is transmitted to the effect control board 80.

  For example, when the initial value of the variable display count during the special game is “100”, the timing T1 shown in FIG. 75 after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game has become the probable big hit symbol is completed. Assume that the special display game by the first variable display device 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbols by the third variable display device 8C have been completed. Subsequently, when the start condition of the special figure game which becomes the 100th time after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation big hit is established at the timing T2, in step S431 of the special gaming state end determination process shown in FIG. By subtracting 1 from the count value of the variable display number counter 123, the count value of the variable display number counter 123 becomes “0” (step S432; Yes). At this time, if the probability changing flag is on, the probability changing flag is cleared and turned off (step S434), and if the hour / middle flag is on, the hour / middle flag is cleared and turned off (step S435). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), at the timing T2 when the 100th special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation state or the time shortening state by the probability variation control is started. The setting of the variable display time is switched from the setting of the variable display time to the setting of the variable display time in the normal gaming state other than the probability variation state and the time shortening state. Further, when the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off, in the jackpot / probability variation determination process shown in FIG. 53, the normal determination value data is set as the determination value data in step S413, and thus the probability variation state ends. The probability of winning a big hit at an appropriate timing corresponding to the game can be returned to the same probability as in the normal gaming state.

  In this way, when the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are cleared at timing T2 and turned off, for example, the 101th special game is started after the big hit gaming state based on the probability change big hit at timing T3. Sometimes the variable display pattern is determined with reference to the normal variable display pattern determination table 150 shown in FIG. 48A even if the variable display of the special symbol is not completed in the 100th special game. Is called. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the probability variation state and the time shortening state from being performed excessively, and to prevent unfairness from occurring by the player.

  Here, the signal output from the board external terminal board 104 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched in its output level (for example, voltage level) when the special game started in the special gaming state is finished. As a result, the output of the signal indicating the special gaming state is stopped. For example, when the start condition of the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A is satisfied at the timing T2, the variable in the special display game by the first variable display device 8A and the decorative display variable display by the third variable display device 8C. It is assumed that the display pattern is determined to be a normal C variable display pattern. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is satisfied at the timing T3 after the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A is started, the special figure by the second variable display device 8B is established. When the variable display pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the game and the fourth variable display device 8D is determined to be the normal A variable display pattern, the special symbol variable display time Ti1 in the normal A variable display pattern is the normal C. The special display game of the 101st time by the second variable display device 8B is the 100th time of the 100th time by the first variable display device 8A. May end at a timing T4 earlier than the timing T5 at which the special figure game ends.

  In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 mounted on the main board 31 switches and controls the output level of the signal on the board external terminal board 104, at the timing T5 when the 100th special game by the first variable display device 8A ends. Thus, for example, the low level indicating that the game is in the special game state is switched to the high level indicating that the game is not in the special game state. When the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time shortening state is controlled, for example, in the variable display of decorative symbols by the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D, an image for informing that the special game state is displayed. May be displayed. In this case, while the image for informing that the game is in the special game state is displayed, the player recognizes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special game state, and the special game or decoration pattern is recognized. The expectation that the display result in the variable display will be a big hit is enhanced. In this embodiment, by switching the output level of the game information at the timing when the special figure game executed in such a special game state is completed, it is possible to output game information indicating an accurate game state. Thereby, for example, a special game is executed in a special game state such as a probability variation state or a time shortening state by using game information indicating an accurate game state in a measuring device connected to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. It is possible to accurately specify (measure) the number of times played or whether or not a big hit has occurred during the special gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 is initially set (random number circuit setting process) from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt is set, and the random number circuit In the setting process, a value based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560 is set as the initial value of the random number. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved. In addition, since the randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and by generating a capture signal using a radio signal for a gaming machine It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to a specific gaming state such as a big hit state from being illegally established.

  In this embodiment, the inverting circuit 532 of the random number circuit 503 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 whose polarity is inverted, and outputs a latch signal for instructing storage of the random number in synchronization with the inverted clock signal SI2. . Therefore, the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number can be stored stably and reliably.

  In the example described above, the clock signal input to the latch signal generation circuit 533 is inverted, and the timing for updating the random number is shifted from the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531, but the latch signal generation circuit 533 is changed. The clock signal to be input to may be delayed. Hereinafter, an example in which the clock signal input to the latch signal generation circuit 533 is delayed will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configurations and processes as those of the above-described embodiment will be omitted, and different parts from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 76 is a block diagram illustrating another configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 76, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the random number circuit 503 includes a delay circuit 532A instead of the inversion circuit 532 shown in FIG.

  The delay circuit 532A delays the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524, thereby generating a delayed clock signal SI4 obtained by delaying the clock signal. Further, the delay circuit 532A outputs the generated delayed clock signal SI4 to the latch signal generation circuit 533. Therefore, in this embodiment, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs a latch signal to the random value storage circuit 531 in synchronization with the delayed clock signal SI4 obtained by delaying the random number generation clock signal SI1.

  The basic functions of the constituent elements of the random number circuit 503 other than the delay circuit 532A are the same as those functions described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the delay circuit 532A of the random number circuit 503 generates the delayed clock signal SI4 and outputs a latch signal for instructing storage of the random number in synchronization with the delayed clock signal SI4. . Therefore, the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number can be stored stably and reliably.

  Next, the overall configuration of a slot machine (slot machine), which is another example of the gaming machine in each of the embodiments described above, will be described. FIG. 77 is a front view of the slot machine as seen from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the slot machine 600, a game panel 601 is detachably attached near the center. Further, a variable display device 602 for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols is provided near the center of the front surface of the game panel 601. In this embodiment, the variable display device 602 has three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the symbol display reels 602a, 602b, and 602c correspond to the symbol display areas, respectively. Is provided.

  Below the game panel 601, an operation table 620 is provided in which various input switches and the like for the player to perform various operations are arranged. On the back side of the operation table 620, a BET switch 621 for betting (paying) coins one by one, and a MAXBET switch 622 for betting coins by the maximum number (three in this example) that can be placed in one game. A settlement switch 623 and a coin insertion slot 624 are provided. Coins inserted into the coin insertion slot 624 are detected by an inserted coin sensor (not shown).

  On the front side of the operation table 620, a start switch 625, a left reel stop switch 626a, a middle reel stop switch 626b, a right reel stop switch 626c, and a coin jam elimination switch 627 are provided. Lamps 628a and 628b are provided on the right and left sides of the operation table 620, respectively. Below the operation table 620, a speaker 630 for outputting sound effects and the like is provided.

  On the upper part of the game panel 601, an image display device (LCD: liquid crystal display device) 640 for notifying a player of a game method, a game state, and the like is provided. For example, when a winning occurs, an image in which a character performs a predetermined action is displayed on the image display device 640 to notify the player that a winning flag described later is set. Two speakers 641L and 641R that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right of the image display device 640.

  The winning combinations generated in the slot machine 600 include a small winning combination, a replay winning, a big bonus winning, and a regular bonus winning. In the slot machine 600, random numbers are extracted at the timing when the start switch 625 is operated, and it is determined whether or not the winning of any winning combination is allowed. The fact that winnings are allowed is said to be “winning internally”. When an internal winning is made, a winning flag indicating that is set in the slot machine 600. In the game with the winning flag set, the reels 602a to 602c are controlled so that the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag can be drawn. On the other hand, in a game in which the winning flag is not set, the reels 602a to 602c are controlled so that no winning is generated.

  Note that the game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 600 incorporates a random number circuit (12-bit random number circuit and 16-bit random number circuit) that generates random numbers. Further, the game control microcomputer extracts the random number (random R) generated by the random number circuit at the timing when the start switch 625 is operated. For example, when the start switch 625 is pressed, the game control microcomputer 560 inputs the detection signal SS from the start switch 625. When the timer circuit 534 of the random number circuit detects that the detection signal SS has been input continuously for a predetermined time, the random number value fetch data “01h” is written to the random value fetch register 539 and the latch signal generation circuit 533 is written. Outputs the latch signal SL to the random value storage circuit 531. When the latch signal SL is input, the random value storage circuit 531 reads and stores the count value updated by the counter 521. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the detection signal SS is continuously input a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), it outputs the output control signal SC to the random number value storage circuit of the random number circuit, A random value (random R) is extracted from the random number circuit. Then, the game control microcomputer determines whether or not the winning is allowed based on the extracted random R.

  Next, an outline of the game provided by the slot machine will be described. For example, when a multiplier is set by inserting a coin from the coin insertion slot 624 and pressing the BET switch 621 or the MAXBET switch 622, the operation of the start switch 625 becomes effective. When the player operates the start switch 625, the symbol display reels 602a to 602c provided in the variable display device 602 start rotating. Further, when a regular bonus prize or a big bonus prize is internally won at the timing when the start switch 625 is operated, for example, a screen on which a predetermined character performs a predetermined action is displayed on the image display device 640. Thus, the player or the like is notified that the internal winning is made.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the symbol display reels 602a to 602c start rotating, the operations of the reel stop switches 626a to 626c become effective. In this state, if the player presses one of the reel stop switches 626a to 626c, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped. When the symbol display reels 602a to 602c are left for a predetermined period or longer without being stopped, the symbol display reels 602a to 602c are automatically stopped.

  When all the symbol display reels 602a to 602c are stopped, the symbol display reels 602a to 602c displayed on the variable display device 602 are determined according to the number of symbols in the upper, middle and lower three symbols. Whether or not a prize is won is determined by a combination of symbols positioned on a valid winning line. When the multiplying number is 1, only the middle one horizontal winning line in the variable display device 602 is valid. When the multiplying number is 2, the top three, the middle, and the bottom three pay lines in the variable display device 602 are valid. When the number of multiplications is 3, a total of five pay lines of three horizontal rows and two diagonal diagonal lines in the variable display device 602 are effective lines.

  When a combination of symbols on the active line becomes a specific display mode determined in advance and a winning occurs, a predetermined game effect is made by sound, light, display on the image display device 640, etc., and the winning is generated The game according to is started.

  In the slot machine 600, the effect control means mounted on the slot machine 600 performs display control of the image display device 640 provided in the slot machine 600. The image display device 640 displays various kinds of information such as a decorative pattern change display and a display for notifying a game state and a game method under the control of the effect control means. Various information such as a decorative symbol change display, a display for notifying a game state and a game method, and the like are displayed by a movie image, and display control of the movie image is performed by the image display device 640. do it.

  As described above, according to the present invention, the big hit gaming state is achieved by the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special figure game by one of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed in the special symbol game by the other variable display device, the progress of the variable display of the special symbol being executed is interrupted and the elapsed time Measurement is interrupted. Thereafter, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the suspended variable display of the special symbol is resumed, and the elapsed time measurement is also resumed. As a result, the big hit gaming state by the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A, and the big hit symbol as a final symbol in the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B. It is possible to prevent competition with the big hit gaming state due to the stop display, and before the variable display result in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is derived and displayed, It becomes difficult to recognize in advance whether or not it will be, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, when the big hit gaming state by the opening / closing operation in the first special variable winning ball device 13A and the second special variable winning ball device 13B can be generated at the same time, the first special variable winning ball device 13A and the second special variable ball device. A lot of prize balls are paid out in a short time when a game ball that should fall and be discharged from the game area 7 without winning any one of the winning ball apparatuses 13B wins the other winning ball apparatus. May end up. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the big hit gaming state in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A, and the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B. The first special variable winning ball device 13A and the second special variable winning ball device 13B are both opened and closed at the same time by controlling so as not to compete with the big hit game state due to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol at. By not generating the big hit gaming state by performing, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being remarkably enhanced, and to prevent the player from becoming extremely advantageous.

  In addition, when the special figure game is started after the big hit gaming state is finished, if the count value of the variable display counter 123 becomes “0”, the probability changing flag and the hour / short hour flag are cleared and turned off, and the probability changing control is performed. From the setting of the variable display time in the probability variation state or the time reduction state due to the above, the setting is switched from the setting of the variable display time in the normal game state other than the probability variation state or the time reduction state. Further, when the probability changing flag is cleared and turned off, the probability of a big hit can be returned to the same probability as in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the state data indicating the special gaming state is not changed despite the decision to end the special gaming state such as the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the state data is changed. The special figure game that is started before the game is played is advantageous to the player as in the case where the special game state continues, and the fairness of the game is hindered. Therefore, when the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time shortening state is determined when the special figure game is started, the probability variation flag or the short time medium flag is cleared when the special figure game is started. In this way, the state data is changed to prevent the player from being unfair.

  When the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation big hit ends, the count value of the variable display number counter 123 is set to the initial value of the variable display number during the special game in step S285 shown in FIG. 57, and the probability fluctuation state by the probability variation control starts. Is done. Thereafter, when the special game is started, the probability variation end determination process is executed in step S237 or the like shown in FIG. 51, and when it is determined that the probability variation state by the probability variation control is terminated, the process shown in FIG. In step S404, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, whereby the time reduction state is controlled. When the special game is started during the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the special game state end determination process is executed in step S260 shown in FIG. The special game state is continuously controlled until the count value of the counter 123 reaches “0”. For this reason, the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time shortening state after the probability variation state by the probability variation control ends is the number of times that the probability variation state is determined to be terminated in the probability variation termination determination process. It will change according to the number of executions of the special figure game. That is, the number of special figure games that can be executed in the special game state including the probability variation state and the time reduction state is fixed to the number of executions of the special figure game corresponding to the initial value of the variable display number during the special game, The number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation state and the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time reduction state can be changed according to the determination result in the probability variation end determination process. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation with respect to the number of special figure games that can be executed in a probability variation state that is more advantageous than the time reduction state is increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the progress of the variable display of the special symbol being executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, for example, FIGS. 74 (B), (D), (F) and (I) By displaying the notification information 71 </ b> A and the character image 71 </ b> C, it is possible to notify that the progress of variable display is interrupted. By this notification, the player can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol does not proceed, so that the player does not have distrust to the fact that the variable symbol display does not proceed and the confirmed symbol is not stopped and displayed.

  Further, when the progress of the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol or the decorative symbol that becomes the lost combination is stopped and displayed. You may do it. As a result, the player does not have any distrust with respect to the fact that the fixed symbol is not stopped and displayed without the variable symbol special symbol display.

  When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A, the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B and the decorative symbol variable by the fourth variable display device 8D are changed. In the variable display of the decoration symbol by the fourth variable display device 8D during the display execution period, a notice effect is given to notify that the variable display result in the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A becomes a big hit symbol. A predetermined effect display can be executed. With such an effect display, the variable display of decorative symbols performed on the third variable display device 8C during the execution of the special figure game by the first variable display device 8A and the special figure game executed by the second variable display device 8B. The player can be interested in any of the decorative display variable displays performed by the fourth variable display device 8D, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the game information indicating the special game state such as the probability variation state or the time shortening state is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special game started in the special game state is completed. The output level (for example, voltage level) is switched. Thereby, game information that accurately reflects the game state can be output.

  In addition, a clock signal generating unit (for example, a clock circuit 501) that generates a clock signal having a predetermined cycle and outputs the generated clock signal to a random number circuit (for example, the random number circuit 503) is provided, and the numerical value updating unit (for example, the counter 521) The numerical data (for example, count value) is updated on the condition that it has been input a predetermined number of times (for example, when the clock signal output circuit 524 inputs the random number generating clock signal SI obtained by dividing the reference clock signal CLK by 16), the counter 521 The part for updating the count value C) and the random number circuit initial setting means (for example, the part for executing step S14 in the game control microcomputer 560) are conditions under which the numerical value updating means updates the numerical data in the initial setting. Sets the number of clock signal inputs (for example, a game control microcomputer 60 executes the step S156). In this way, the numerical value updating means is configured to preset the number of input clock signals, which is a condition for updating numerical data, so that the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be further improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) is a numerical data set (for example, a part for executing step S14 in the game control microcomputer 560) (for example, the part for executing step S14 in the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical value calculating means (for example, step S154b in the gaming microcomputer) that calculates a predetermined initial value of the count value using microcomputer identification information (for example, the ID number unique to the gaming control microcomputer 560) is executed. In this case, the random number circuit initial setting means includes a numerical value of the game control microcomputer 560 by calculating the ID number and a predetermined value (for example, a part for obtaining the calculated value by adding the predetermined value to the ID number). Based on the value calculated by the calculation by the calculation means Setting the period value (e.g., a microcomputer for a game is in performing the process of step S154b, it sets a calculated value determined as the initial value of the count value). Thus, since the initial value is set based on the value calculated by the calculation using the microcomputer identification information, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be further improved. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the initial value of the random number simply by looking at the microcomputer identification information, and the security can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1), the game medium is won in the winning area (for example, the normal winning ball device 12A, the normal variable winning ball device 12B) in the gaming area (for example, the game region 7), Including a winning detection means (for example, a first starting port switch 20a and a second starting port switch 20b) for detecting that the starting condition is satisfied and outputting a winning detection signal (for example, a winning detection signal SS). (For example, the random number circuit 503) stores the numerical data (for example, the count value) updated by the numerical value updating means (for example, the counter 521) based on the input of the winning detection signal from the winning detection means. Latch signal output means (for example, latch signal generation circuit 533) that outputs a latch signal for instructing to be stored in (for example, random value storage circuit 531) Thus, the latch signal output means reads the random number value when the winning detection signal is continuously input from the winning detection means for a predetermined period (for example, when the timer circuit 534 measures a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms)). The latch signal is output (for example, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526). The portion that is output to the random value storage circuit 531 as the latch signal SL in synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inverter circuit 532). Thus, when the random number storage means stores the random number based on the output of the latch signal, the latch signal is output on condition that the winning detection signal is input continuously for a predetermined period. Since it is configured, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise from being erroneously recognized as the input of the input detection signal, outputting the latch signal, and storing the generated random number. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a random number generated by an illegal latch signal is stored due to an output of a latch signal due to an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine. .

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1), the game medium is won in the winning area (for example, the normal winning ball device 12A, the normal variable winning ball device 12B) in the gaming area (for example, the game region 7), Including a winning detection means (for example, a first starting port switch 20a and a second starting port switch 20b) for detecting that the starting condition is satisfied and outputting a winning detection signal (for example, a winning detection signal SS). (For example, the random number circuit 503) stores the numerical data (for example, the count value) updated by the numerical value updating means (for example, the counter 521) based on the input of the winning detection signal from the winning detection means. Latch signal output means (for example, latch signal generation circuit 533) that outputs a latch signal for instructing to be stored in (for example, random value storage circuit 531) The latch signal output means outputs a latch signal on condition that the winning detection signal is continuously input from the winning detection means for a predetermined period (for example, the latch signal generation circuit 533 generates a random number read signal output circuit). The random number read signal output from 526 is synchronized with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inverting circuit 532 and is output to the random value storage circuit 531 as the latch signal SL), random number reading means (for example, The part for executing steps S204b and S209b in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed by the timer interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means (for example, the part for executing steps S21 to S35 in the game control microcomputer 560). The winning detection signal is continuously received from the winning detection means for a predetermined number of times. (For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S203, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process indicated by the interrupt counter is a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times)). The random number value stored by the random number storage means is read (for example, the CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random number value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503), The predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) is shorter than the period (for example, 6 ms) in which a predetermined number of timer interruption processes are executed. As described above, when reading the random number from the random number storage means, the random number is read from the random number storage means on condition that the winning detection signal is continuously input while the timer interruption process is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random number storage means is updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number storage unit from being read again.

  In addition, the random number circuit initial setting means (for example, the part executing step S14 in the game control microcomputer 560) is numerical data (for example, a count value) updated by the numerical value updating means (for example, the counter 521) in the initial setting. Numerical order setting means (for example, a game control micro) for setting whether or not to change the order of values from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value (for example, the permutation of count values C updated by the counter 521) The random number circuit (for example, the random number circuit 503) includes a numerical value data up to a predetermined final value when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means. Notification signal output means for outputting a notification signal indicating that it has been updated (for example, an output terminal of the counter 521) When the notification signal is output, when the random number circuit initial setting means is set to change the arrangement order of the numerical data from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the numerical value updating means And numerical value order changing means for changing the order of the numerical data to be updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value (for example, a part for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 560). In this way, when the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value, the arrangement order from the predetermined initial value to the predetermined final value is updated, so the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit Can be further improved.

  In addition, a first display device (for example, the first variable display device 8A, the first variable display device) that performs variable display of identification information based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins the normal winning ball device 12A). 3 variable display device 8C) and a second display device (for example, second display device) that performs variable display of identification information based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 12B). The game control microcomputer is based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball wins the normal winning ball device 12A), and the second variable display device 8B and the fourth variable display device 8D). First, it is determined whether or not the display result of variable display of identification information on the first display device is a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) before the display result of variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed. In advance The big hit / probability change determination process (step S238) is performed in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the first special symbol process process (step S26a), which is a fixed means (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560). Portion) and the second start condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins the normal variable winning ball device 12B), the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the second display device is displayed as a specific display result (for example, Second pre-determination means (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560) that determines whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed. A portion for executing the big hit / probability change determination process in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process (step S26b), and a first preliminary determination means Depending on the determination result, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the identification information on the first display device to the display result being derived and displayed is variable from any one of a plurality of predetermined variable display times. First variable display time determining means for determining the display time (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560, which executes variable display start processing (step S111) of the first special symbol process (step S26a). Part) and a plurality of types of variable display times in which variable display times from the start of variable display of the identification information on the second display device until the display result is derived and displayed in accordance with the determination result of the second prior determination means Second variable display time determining means for determining any one of the display times as the variable display time (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) The variable display start process (step S111) of the second special symbol process (step S26b) and the variable display after the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display device. First time measuring means for measuring elapsed time (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560, which is the first in the variable display start processing (step S111) of the first special symbol process (step S26a). The variable display time timer 122A is set, and the variable display control processing (step S112) is performed by subtracting the first variable display time timer 122A), and the variable display after the variable display of the identification information is started on the second display device. Second time measuring means for measuring elapsed time (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560, The second variable display time timer 122B is set in the variable display start time process of the separate symbol process (step S26b), and the second variable display time timer 122A is subtracted in step S332 of the variable display control process), the first First measurement determination means for determining whether or not the variable display time determined by the first variable display time determination means has passed by measurement by the time measurement means (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560, A portion for determining whether the first variable display time timer 122A has become 0 in the variable display control process (step S112) of the one special symbol process (step S26a), and the second variable display time by the measurement by the second time measuring means. Second measurement determination means for determining whether or not the variable display time determined by the determination means has elapsed (for example, a game A function of the control microcomputer 560, and a part for determining whether or not the second variable display time timer 122B becomes 0 in step S333 of the variable display control process of the second special symbol process (step S26b), The first time measuring means is configured to calculate an elapsed time of the variable display time based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second display device when the variable display of the identification information is executed on the first display device. First measurement interruption resuming means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that resumes measurement of elapsed time when the specific gaming state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second display device is interrupted. 560, a variable display progress stop flag in the variable display control process (step S112) of the first special symbol process (step S26a). If it is on, the first variable display device special symbol operation setting is executed without subtracting the first variable display time timer 122A). In this way, when the variable display of the identification information is executed on the first display device when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second display device, the progress in the variable display of the identification information by the first time measuring means Time measurement is interrupted. Thereafter, the elapsed time measurement is resumed when the specific gaming state ends. This prevents the specific gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of identification information on the first display device and the specific gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of identification information on the second display device from occurring simultaneously. be able to. Further, since the variable display of the identification information proceeds on the first display device until the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second display device, it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first display device. Is difficult to recognize.

  In addition, the variable display progress stop flag is turned on in the variable display control process (step S112) of the first special symbol process (step S26a), which is a function of the first measurement interruption restart means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560). If the elapsed time measurement is interrupted by the first variable display device special symbol operation setting without subtracting the first variable display time timer 122A, the first display device (for example, the first display device) The first variable display continuation notification control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) performs control to notify that the variable display of the identification information is continued in the first variable display device 8A and the third variable display device 8C). In the variable display stop process (step S113) of the first special symbol process (step S26a), the variable display progress stop Is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in the effect symbol command control process (step S28), and the symbol variable display of the first effect control process (step S611) is performed by the effect control microcomputer 118. For example, notification information 71A shown in FIGS. 74 (B), (D), (F), and (I) can be obtained by executing the notification display control setting during progress stop (step S505) in the middle process (step S735). It further includes a portion for displaying the character image 71C shown in FIG. 74 (I) on the fourth variable display device 8D. Thus, when the measurement of elapsed time is interrupted by the first measurement interruption resuming means, the variable display of the identification information on the first display device is continued by the control of the first variable display continuing notification control means. Notification that there is. Thereby, even when the variable display of the identification information on the first display device does not proceed due to the measurement of the elapsed time being interrupted by the first measurement interruption resuming means, the player is not distrusted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer is a first measurement interruption resumption means (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560, which is a variable display control process (step S112) of the first special symbol process (step S26a)). If the variable display progress stop flag is on, specified when the measurement of elapsed time is interrupted by the first variable display device special symbol operation setting without subtracting the first variable display time timer 122A) Control is performed to display a non-specific display result (for example, a loss symbol) different from the display result (for example, the big hit symbol) on the first display device (for example, the first variable display device 8A, the third variable display device 8C) ( For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines YES in step S331, the second variable display device 8B Loss portion to stop displaying the symbols, and by the effect control microcomputer 118 executes the process of step S505, the portion to stop displaying the decorative pattern to be losing combination in the fourth variable display device 8D). Thus, when the measurement of elapsed time is interrupted by the first measurement interruption resuming unit, a non-specific display result different from the specific display result is displayed on the first display device. Thereby, even when the variable display of the identification information on the first display device does not proceed due to the measurement of the elapsed time being interrupted by the first measurement interruption resuming means, the player is not distrusted.

  Also, the first pre-determination means (for example, a function of the game control microcomputer 560, which is a big hit / probability determination process (step S110) in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the first special symbol process (step S26a)). When the variable display of the identification information is executed based on the determination that the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is made by the portion that executes S238), the first display device (for example, the first variable) Preliminary effect determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining to execute a preliminary announcement that notifies that the variable display result of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the display device 8A and the third variable display device 8C) 560 executes the variable display start process (step S111) of the first special symbol process (step S26a). When the first jackpot flag is on, the second display device is configured to determine whether to execute the notice effect by the notice effect determining means. A notice effect control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled by the second variable display device 8B) that controls the execution of the notice effect in the second variable display device 8B and the fourth variable display device 8D (for example, When the game is started, the variable display start process is executed in response to the value of the second special symbol process flag being “1”. The portion to be determined as the variable display pattern for executing the notice effect, or the effect control microcomputer 118 by the second variable display pattern command from the main board 31 By starting variable display of decorative symbols by the fourth variable display device 8D according to the specified variable display pattern, for example, images as shown in FIGS. 73 (H) and (J) are displayed on the fourth variable display device 8D. Etc.). Thus, when the variable display of the identification information is executed based on the determination that the specific display result is made by the first pre-determination means, the notice effect determining means decides to execute the notice effect. Based on what has been done, a notice effect is executed on the second display device under the control of the notice effect control means. As a result, when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first display device, a notice effect is executed to notify that the variable display result of the identification information on the first display device becomes the specific display result on the second display device. Therefore, the player can be interested in both the first display device and the second display device, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol in the special game by the first variable display device 8A, the special game and the fourth variable by the second variable display device 8B are determined. In the variable display of the decorative symbol by the fourth variable display device 8D during the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol by the display device 8D is executed, the variable display result of the special graphic game by the first variable display device 8A becomes the big hit symbol. The explanation was made on the assumption that a notice effect for notifying the effect was executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable display device is further determined when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol in the special game by the second variable display device 8B. In the special symbol game by the second variable display device 8B, the special symbol game by 8A and the variable display of the decorative symbol by the third variable display device 8C during the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol by the third variable display device 8C is executed. A notice effect may be executed for notifying that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol.

  In the above embodiment, after the probability variation flag is set in step S284 in FIG. 57, when it is determined in step S403 in FIG. 52 that the probability variation state by probability variation control is to be terminated, in step S404. In the above description, it is assumed that the probability changing flag is cleared and the hour / short flag is set to the on state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hour / short flag may be set to the ON state together with the probability changing flag in step S284 of FIG. In this case, when it is determined in step S403 in FIG. 52 that the probability variation state is to be ended, the probability changing flag is cleared in step S404, while the time reduction flag is kept on. do it. That is, when the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation big hit ends, the game control flag setting area stores the time variation state data showing “1” together with the probability variation state data showing “1”, and the probability variation end determination process determines the probability. When it is determined that the change state is to be ended, the probability change state indicating “1” stored in the game control flag setting area at the timing of starting the special-purpose game that triggered the determination. Only data may be deleted and updated to “0”.

  In the above embodiment, when the special symbol indicating “3” is derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B, it is usually a big hit, and “7” is calculated. It has been described that the special symbol shown is usually a big hit when it is derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if any special symbol variably displayed in the special symbol game is derived and displayed as a fixed symbol, it can be controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state After the process is completed, it may be possible to control the time reduction state. Alternatively, even if any special symbol variably displayed in the special game is derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol, it can be controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, it can be controlled to the probability fluctuation state Also good.

  In addition, the arrangement of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B can be arbitrarily changed according to the configuration and specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B do not need to be configured as independent display devices. For example, in the two display areas of one display device, the first variable display device 8A described above. The display may be substantially the same as that of the second variable display device 8B.

  Further, each of the two display devices may operate so as to be interchangeable as one of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B described above. For example, a period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating by receiving power supply is divided into a first period and a second period, and one of the two display devices displays the first variable display in the first period. The other device operates as the second variable display device 8B while operating as the device 8A. On the other hand, in the second period, one of the two display devices operates as the second variable display device 8B and the other operates as the first variable display device 8A.

  Alternatively, of the two display devices, the one in which the condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied first and the special symbol variable display is started may operate as the first variable display device 8A described above. Then, when the condition for starting the special figure game by the other display device on which the special symbol is stopped and displayed during execution of the special figure game is established, the other display device is set to the second variable display device described above. It may be operated as 8B.

  Further, the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D have all or a part of the functions as the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. You may make it perform the variable display of a special symbol while performing the effect display used as a 2nd effect. Alternatively, the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B have all or part of the functions of the third and fourth variable display devices 8C and 8D, for example, perform variable display of special symbols, and You may make it perform the effect display etc. which become an effect. Further, when the variable display result of the identification information in both the first and third variable display devices 8A and 4C becomes a big hit symbol as the specific display result, or both the second and fourth variable display devices 8B and 8D. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state when the variable display result of the identification information in FIG. 1 becomes the big hit symbol as the specific display result. That is, variable display of identification information as the first variable display means is performed by both the first and third variable display devices 8A, 4C, while the second variable is performed by both the second and fourth variable display devices 8B, 8D. You may make it perform variable display etc. of the identification information as a display means.

  In the embodiment described above, the normal winning ball device 12A and the normal variable winning ball device 12B are described as the first and second start winning ports. That is, it has been described that two start winning openings are provided corresponding to the two variable display devices, and the first start condition and the second start condition are different from each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one start winning opening corresponding to both the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B is provided, and the first variable display device 8A and the first variable display device 8A are provided. The starting conditions for executing the special figure game by the two variable display devices 8B may be the same.

  In this case, when a game ball won in one start winning opening is detected by the start opening switch, for example, numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number updated by the random number circuit 503 or the like is extracted, and the first variable display Either the first start condition for executing the special figure game by the device 8A or the second start condition for executing the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is established. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start winning data “first” is stored in the special figure holding memory 570, while when the second start condition is satisfied, the start winning data “second” is stored in the special figure holding memory 570. Just remember. In this case, for example, the first and second start conditions may be alternately satisfied each time numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number is extracted. Further, when extracting the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determination random number, the numerical data indicating the value of the distribution determination random number is extracted, and the first and second values are extracted according to the value of the distribution determination random number. Any one of the start conditions may be satisfied.

  Further, based on the value of the jackpot determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like, it may be determined which of the first and second start conditions is satisfied. For example, it is assumed that the value of the jackpot determination random number takes a value in the range of “0” to “599”. In this case, when the value of the big hit determination random number extracted according to the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening is within the range of “0” to “299”, the first starting condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted jackpot determination random number is within the range of “300” to “599”, the second start condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, when the value of the jackpot determination random number is “3”, it is determined that the variable display result in the special game by the first variable display device 8A is the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot determination random number is determined. When the value of is “303”, it may be determined that the variable display result in the special figure game by the second variable display device 8B is the jackpot symbol. Alternatively, the internal structure of one start winning opening is divided into a first path for guiding the game ball to the installation position of the first detection switch that establishes the first start condition when the game ball is detected, and second when the game ball is detected. The first path is divided into either the first path or the second path by separating the game ball that has won the start winning opening into the second path that guides the game ball to the installation position of the second detection switch that establishes the start condition. And you may make it guide | lead so that either of a 2nd detection switch may detect.

  In addition, numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number extracted when the game ball won in one start winning opening is detected by the start opening switch is stored in the special figure holding memory 570, and the first variable Each time a start condition for starting a special figure game by either the display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B is satisfied, a big hit determination is made from the head entry (entry of the holding number “1”) in the special figure holding memory 570. The numerical data indicating the value of the random number for use may be read out, and various processes for starting a special game such as a big hit determination process may be executed. Specifically, the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B are sequentially read from the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determination random number extracted when the previously won game ball is detected by the start switch. Among any special figure games, any special figure game in which the start condition is established first may be used.

  Further, when the normal winning ball device 12A and the normal variable winning ball device 12B are provided corresponding to the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B, respectively, the normal winning ball device 12A and the normal variable winning ball device 12B are provided. When a game ball wins one of the ball devices 12B, for example, numerical data updated as one kind of big hit determination random number by the random number circuit 503 (for example, numerical data stored in one count value storage circuit) And the start winning data “first” or the start winning data “second” is a big hit corresponding to which of the normal winning ball device 12A and the normal variable winning ball device 12B the game ball has won. It may be stored in the special figure holding memory 570 in association with numerical data indicating the value of the random number for determination.

  In the above embodiment, the first start condition for executing the special game by the first variable display device 8A is established when the game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 12A is detected by the first start port switch 20a. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 12B is detected by the second starting port switch 20b, the second start condition for executing the special game by the second variable display device 8B is satisfied. As explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball won in the normal winning ball device 12A is detected by the first start port switch 20a, a special game by the second variable display device 8B is executed. While the second starting condition is satisfied, and when the game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 12B is detected by the second starting port switch 20b, the first variable display device 8A is used to execute the special game. One start condition may be satisfied.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a correspondence relationship between which of the first and second start conditions is satisfied in response to detection of the game ball by the first and second start port switches 20a and 20b, respectively. , May be changed. As a specific example, in the initial setting state such as immediately after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the first start condition is satisfied when the game ball won in the normal winning ball device 12A is detected by the first start port switch 20a. On the other hand, the second start condition is established when the game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 12B is detected by the second start port switch 20b. After that, when the big hit gaming state due to the big win in the special game by either the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B is ended, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the normal winning is achieved. When a game ball won in the ball device 12A is detected by the first start port switch 20a, the first start condition is satisfied, while a game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 12B is detected by the second start port switch 20b. The setting may be changed so that the second start condition is satisfied. Further, each time the big hit gaming state is finished, a correspondence relationship is established as to which of the first and second start conditions is established in response to the detection of the game ball by the first and second start port switches 20a and 20b. It may be controlled to change.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure holding memory 570 common to both the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B stores numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number, start winning data, etc. as the holding number. It has been described as being stored in association with each other. On the other hand, a separate special figure reservation memory may be provided for each of the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. For example, a first special figure reservation memory may be provided corresponding to the first variable display device 8A, and a second special figure reservation memory may be provided corresponding to the second variable display device 8B.

  In the above embodiment, the start winning data is stored in the special figure holding memory 570 common to both the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B together with the numerical data indicating the value of the big hit determination random number. Thus, when the game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 12A is detected by the first starting port switch 20a, the first starting condition is satisfied and the special game by the first variable display device 8A can be executed. When the game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 12B is detected by the second starting port switch 20b, the second starting condition is established and the special game by the second variable display device 8B can be executed. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and numerical data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot determination is stored in the special figure holding memory 570 common to both the first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8B. Each time the start condition for starting the special figure game by either the first variable display device 8A or the second variable display device 8B is satisfied, the top entry (holding number “1”) in the special figure holding memory 570 is satisfied. Numerical data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot determination may be read out from the entry and various processes for starting the special game such as the jackpot / probability determination process may be executed. In other words, regardless of whether the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 12A serving as the first starting winning port or the normal variable winning ball device 12B serving as the second starting winning port, The first variable display device 8A and the second variable display device 8A are sequentially read from numerical data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot determination extracted by being detected by the start port switch (the first start port switch 20a or the second start port switch 20b). Of the special game with one of the two variable display devices 8B, it may be used for a special game in which the start condition is established first.

  In addition, as long as the gaming machine of the present invention is a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine, for example, a general electric machine or a ball game machine with a probability setting function called a pachi-kon may be used. Furthermore, it is applicable not only to a CR-type pachinko gaming machine that lends a ball with a prepaid card, but also to a pachinko gaming machine that lends a ball with cash. That is, any form of game machine may be used as long as it has an image display device such as an LCD and can variably display symbols as identification information. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of winning balls, and encloses game balls and gives points in response to detection of winning balls. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine.

  The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided on a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium, but preinstalled in a storage device such as a computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form distributed by keeping it. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view which shows the structure of an operation key. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration example in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board and a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an effect control board and a voice frame lamp base. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example in case a count value permutation change circuit changes the permutation of the count value which a counter outputs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a count value permutation change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random number maximum value setting register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a period setting register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a count value update register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random value taking-in register. It is explanatory drawing of an example of the random number update system selection register and the random number update system selection data written in the random number update system selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random number circuit starting register. It is a circuit diagram which shows one structural example of a random value storage circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random value storage circuit, and the timing when a random value storage circuit outputs each signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map of the storage area in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in a user program management area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of initial value change system setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a user program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a random number circuit setting program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which updates the value of random R, or reads the value of random R when the 1st random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which updates the value of random R, or reads the value of random R, when the 2nd random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows each memory with which the microcomputer for game control is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table memory for jackpot determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number maximum value reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value change process. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random number circuit, and the timing when each signal is generated in a random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value update process. It is a flowchart which shows a count value permutation change process. It is an explanatory view showing the configuration of a production control command. It is an explanatory view showing how to send the production control command. It is an explanatory view showing the configuration of a production control command. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable display pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal process performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a probability change completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit and probability variation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start time process performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows special game state completion | finish determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the variable display stop performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process performed within a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is a display screen figure which shows the menu screen for game shops displayed on a 3rd variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the history data clear screen and option screen which are displayed with a 3rd variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the menu screen for players displayed on a 3rd variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the jackpot information screen, presentation introduction screen, and jackpot probability screen which are displayed with a 3rd variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the slump graph screen displayed with a 3rd variable display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production control main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the data management process at the time of initialization. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows game information display processing. It is a flowchart which shows game data collection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during symbol variable display performed within a 2nd effect control process process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode in a 3rd and 4th variable display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode in a 3rd and 4th variable display apparatus. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the specific operation example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the other structural example of a random number circuit. It is the front view which looked at the slot machine from the front.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 6 Game board 7 Game area 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D Variable display device 9 Start memory LED
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Normal symbol display device 12A Normal winning ball apparatus 12B Normal variable winning ball apparatus 13A, 13B Special variable winning ball apparatus 20a, 20b Start-up switch 30 Speaker 31 Main board 40, 41, 42 Game effect lamp 80 Production control board 54 ROM
55 RAM
56 CPU
100 Dispensing control board 108 Peripheral command relay board 122A, 122B Variable display time timer 123 Variable display counter 150 Normal variable display pattern determination table 151 Special variable display pattern determination table 152 Reach variable display pattern determination table 153 Big hit variable display Pattern determination table 560 Microcomputer for game control 910 Power supply board

Claims (10)

A display device that performs a predetermined display is provided, and based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified by the display device is performed, and a variable display of the identification information A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when the display result is a predetermined specific display result,
A game equipped with a game control microcomputer having a built-in random number circuit for generating random numbers, executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game, and outputting a display control signal for controlling the display device A control board;
A display control board equipped with a display control microcomputer for controlling the display device based on the display control signal;
Initialization operation means provided on the rear side of the gaming machine and outputting an initialization signal in accordance with the operation;
Provided on the front side of the gaming machine and used for a display operation for displaying a history of games played on the gaming machine on the display device when a predetermined operation screen is displayed on the display device. Operating means,
The random number circuit includes:
Numerical value updating means for updating numerical data according to a predetermined order from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value in a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated based on an input of a predetermined signal;
Random number storage means for storing numerical data updated by the numerical value update means as a random number value,
The game control microcomputer is:
Random number circuit initial setting means for initial setting of the random number circuit when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
Interrupt setting means for setting to generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time after the random number circuit initial setting means performs the initial setting of the random number circuit;
An interrupt process executing means for executing a timer interrupt process including the game control process when the timer interrupt occurs;
In the timer interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means, random number reading means for reading a random value stored in the random number storage means when a variable display execution condition is satisfied;
Whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is set as the specific display result by determining whether or not the random number value read by the random number reading means matches a predetermined determination value, Prior determination means for determining before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed,
Storing game state data indicating a progress state of the game, and storing the game state data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization signal confirmation means for confirming whether or not the initialization signal is output from the initialization operation means;
The gaming state stored in the game control storage means on the condition that power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization confirmation means confirms that the initialization signal is not output. Game control recovery means for executing a game control recovery process for recovering the progress state of the game based on the data;
The game state data stored in the game control storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization signal confirmation means confirms that the initialization signal is output. Game control initialization means for executing a game control initialization process for initializing
The display control microcomputer is:
Display control means for performing variable display of identification information on the display device based on a display control signal from the game control microcomputer, and deriving and displaying a display result according to a determination result by the prior determination means;
Based on a display control signal from the gaming control microcomputer, gaming history data creating means for creating gaming history data indicating a history of gaming performed in the gaming machine;
Display control storage means for storing game history data created by the game history data creation means, and storing the game history data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
A game history display process for executing a game history display process for displaying the history of the game on the display device based on the game history data stored in the display control storage means in response to an operation of the display operation means. Means,
Game state data initialization confirmation means for confirming whether or not the game state data has been initialized in the game control microcomputer;
On the condition that power supply to the gaming machine is started and the gaming state data initialization confirming means confirms that the gaming state data has not been initialized, the display control Game history recovery means for enabling display of game history to be recovered based on the game history data stored in the storage means;
An initialization operation for initializing the gaming history data when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the gaming state data initialization confirmation means confirms that the gaming state data has been initialized. An operation screen display processing means for displaying an operation screen;
An enabling means for enabling an initialization operation for initializing a game history by the display operation means only when the initialization operation screen is displayed by the operation screen display means;
Initialization operation determination means for determining whether or not the initialization operation by the display operation means has been performed when the initialization operation is enabled by the enabling means;
A game for executing a game history initialization process for initializing the game history data stored in the display control storage means on the condition that the initialization operation determination means determines that an initialization operation has been performed. History initialization means, and
In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means identifies the game control microcomputer in which the predetermined initial value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value update means is assigned to each game control microcomputer. A game machine characterized in that it is set based on microcomputer identification information. The display control microcomputer is:
After the power supply to the gaming machine is started, in the normal state where the identification information can be variably displayed on the display device, the identification information is variably displayed on the display device for a predetermined period. Variable display determination means for determining whether or not,
When the variable display determination means determines that the identification information is not variably displayed on the display device, the game history based on the game history data is displayed according to the operation by the display operation means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising normal operation screen display means for displaying a normal operation screen that enables the operation. The display control microcomputer is:
Game history stopping means for stopping display of the game history on the display device when a signal indicating the start of variable display is input while the game history is displayed on the display device;
2. The variable display switching means for switching the display on the display device to the variable display of the identification information when the display of the game history is stopped by the game history stop means. Or the gaming machine according to claim 2. The gaming control microcomputer is capable of specifying that one of the gaming control restoration processing and the gaming control initialization processing is executed after power supply to the gaming machine is started. A power supply start process specific signal output means for outputting a supply start process specific signal;
The display control microcomputer determines whether or not the power supply start process specific signal is input during a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. It further includes an input determination means,
The said game state data initialization confirmation means confirms whether the said game state data was initialized based on the determination by the said start time process specific signal input determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of 3 to 3. The game control microcomputer outputs a demonstration display control signal to the display control board for instructing to display a demonstration image displayed when the identification information is not variably displayed on the display device for a predetermined period. An output means,
The display control microcomputer is configured to display the demo display after the display of the game history is completed in response to an operation by the display operation means on the display device based on the input of the demonstration display control signal. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising demo display switching means for displaying a demonstration image according to the control signal. The display operation means inputs an operation signal output in response to an operation to the display control microcomputer,
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the history display processing means executes the game history display processing based on the operation signal. A game ball number counting means for performing a game by firing a game ball in the game area and counting the number of game balls to be driven into the game area,
7. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control storage unit stores the number of game balls counted by the game ball number counting unit as the game history data. . The game control microcomputer incorporates a plurality of random number circuits having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means,
The random number circuit initial setting means sets a usable random number circuit from among a plurality of random number circuits built in the game control microcomputer in the initial setting,
The game according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising random number stop means for stopping a function of a random number circuit other than the random number circuit set to be usable by the random number circuit initial setting means. Machine. In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means stores numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means in a numerical maximum value register in which a value as the maximum value of the predetermined range in which numerical data is updated is set. Set a predetermined maximum value within the range,
The numerical value updating means includes
Set value determining means for determining whether or not the predetermined maximum value set by the random number circuit initial setting means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value;
When the predetermined maximum value set in the numerical value maximum value register is determined to be less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value by the set value determining means, the numerical value maximum value register can be updated by the numerical value updating means. 9. A gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising maximum value resetting means for resetting a predetermined value within a range of numerical data. Whether the random number circuit initial setting means changes the predetermined initial value set by the random number circuit initial setting means when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means in the initial setting. Set
The random number circuit includes a notification signal output means for outputting a notification signal indicating that the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value when the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means. ,
Initial value changing means for changing the value of the predetermined initial value when the initial value is set to be changed by the random number circuit initial setting means based on the output of the notification signal. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

Images